É2185848501eËÍ - Mercedes Benz USA

É2185848501eËÍ - Mercedes Benz USA
CLS
É2185848501eËÍ
2185848501
Order no. 6515 1577 13 Part no. 218 584 85 01 Edition C-2015
CLS Operator's Manual
Operator's Manual
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
RBluetooth®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in succesX
sion indicate an instruction with several steps.
This symbol tells you where you can
(Y
page) find more information about a topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or an
YY
instruction that is continued on the
next page.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message in the
play multifunction/COMAND/Audio display.
X
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
©Daimler
AG: not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
As at 27.06.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry
specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical
features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's
Manual
Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
RMaintenance
2185848501 É2185848501eËÍ
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 22
Safety ................................................... 43
Opening and closing ........................... 83
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 121
Climate control ................................. 131
Driving and parking .......................... 147
On-board computer and displays .... 225
Stowage and features ...................... 285
Maintenance and care ...................... 311
Roadside Assistance ........................ 325
Wheels and tires ............................... 343
Technical data ................................... 383
3
4
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel
drive)
Function/notes ............................. 197
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Cleaning ......................................... 322
Function/notes ............................. 209
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 246
Function/notes ................................ 70
Warning lamp ................................. 276
Accident
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 138
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 263
Function/information .................... 218
Active Driving Assistance package .. 218
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 263
Function/information .................... 221
Active multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 110
Active Parking Assist
Detecting parking spaces .............. 201
Display message ............................ 264
Exiting a parking space .................. 203
Function/notes ............................. 200
Important safety notes .................. 200
Parking .......................................... 202
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 79
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 75
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 194
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 258
Function/notes ............................. 125
Switching on/off ........................... 126
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 389
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 59
Display message ............................ 254
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 51
Important safety notes .................... 50
Introduction ..................................... 50
Knee bag .......................................... 52
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 53
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ........................................... 45
Pelvis air bag ................................... 52
Side impact air bag .......................... 52
Window curtain air bag .................... 53
AIR FLOW ........................................... 140
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 145
Important safety notes .................. 145
Rear ............................................... 146
Setting ........................................... 145
Setting the center air vents ........... 145
Setting the side air vents ............... 145
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRMATIC
Display message ............................ 261
Function/notes ............................. 193
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 81
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 81
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 239
Setting the color (on-board computer) ............................................. 239
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ................................................ 195
Index
Animals in the vehicle ......................... 70
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 296
Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 235
Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 235
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 316
Hiding a service message .............. 316
Notes ............................................. 316
Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 316
Service message ............................ 316
Special service requirements ......... 317
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 81
Function ........................................... 81
Switching off the alarm .................... 81
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Display message ............................ 261
Function/notes ............................. 213
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 257
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 317
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 154
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 153
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 122
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 161
Automatic drive program ............... 164
Changing gear ............................... 161
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 158
Display message ............................ 270
Drive program display ....................
Driving tips ....................................
Emergency running mode ..............
Engaging drive position ..................
Engaging neutral ............................
Engaging park position (AMG vehicles) ...............................................
Engaging park position automatically ...............................................
Engaging reverse gear ...................
Engaging the park position ............
Kickdown .......................................
Manual drive program ....................
Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) ...............................................
Manual drive program (vehicles
with Sports package AMG) ............
Overview ........................................
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Program selector button ................
Pulling away ...................................
Selector lever ................................
Starting the engine ........................
Steering wheel paddle shifters ......
Transmission position display ........
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................
Transmission positions ..................
Automatic transmission emergency mode .......................................
158
161
167
160
159
158
159
159
159
162
164
165
165
157
167
162
152
157
152
163
157
158
161
167
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 71
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Function/notes ................................ 71
Important safety notes .................... 72
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 87
Replacing ......................................... 87
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 333
Display message ............................ 259
Important safety notes .................. 331
Jump starting ................................. 335
Belt
see Seat belts
5
6
Index
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 237
Display message ............................ 263
Notes/function .............................. 214
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Box (trunk) ......................................... 291
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 248
Notes ............................................. 390
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 256
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 70
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75
BAS .................................................. 71
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 71
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 390
Display message ............................ 246
High-performance brake system .... 176
HOLD function ............................... 191
Important safety notes .................. 175
Maintenance .................................. 176
Parking brake ................................ 172
Riding tips ...................................... 175
Warning lamp ................................. 275
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 33
C
California
Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 24
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Car key
see SmartKey
Care
360° camera ................................. 322
Car wash ........................................ 317
Carpets .......................................... 324
Display ........................................... 322
Exhaust pipe .................................. 322
Exterior lights ................................ 321
Gear or selector lever .................... 323
Interior ........................................... 322
Matte finish ................................... 320
Notes ............................................. 317
Paint .............................................. 319
Plastic trim .................................... 322
Power washer ................................ 319
Rear view camera .......................... 321
Roof lining ...................................... 324
Seat belt ........................................ 324
Seat cover ..................................... 323
Sensors ......................................... 321
Steering wheel ............................... 323
Trim pieces .................................... 323
Washing by hand ........................... 318
Wheels ........................................... 320
Windows ........................................ 320
Wiper blades .................................. 321
Wooden trim .................................. 323
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 290
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 233
Center console
Lower section .................................. 38
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 39
Upper section .................................. 37
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 240
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 84
Child
Restraint system .............................. 65
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 68
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 66
On the front-passenger seat ............ 68
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 68
Top Tether ....................................... 67
Index
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 68
Rear doors ....................................... 69
Children
Special seat belt retractor ............... 64
Cigarette lighter ................................ 297
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 321
Climate control
Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 136
Controlling automatically ............... 140
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 138
Defrosting the windows ................. 143
Defrosting the windshield .............. 142
Dual-zone automatic climate control ................................................. 133
General notes ................................ 132
Indicator lamp ................................ 140
Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 138
Information about using dual-zone
automatic climate control .............. 134
Maximum cooling .......................... 143
Overview of systems ...................... 132
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 144
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 140
Rear control panel ......................... 136
Refrigerant ..................................... 392
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 392
Setting the air distribution ............. 141
Setting the air vents ...................... 145
Setting the airflow ......................... 142
Setting the climate mode (AIR
FLOW) ............................................ 140
Setting the temperature ................ 141
Setting the temperature with 3zone automatic climate control ..... 141
Setting the temperature with dualzone automatic climate control ..... 141
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 144
Switching on/off ........................... 138
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 144
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 143
Switching the ZONE function on/
off .................................................. 142
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 32
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 381
see Emergency spare wheel
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Display message ............................ 249
Operation/notes .............................. 73
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 322
Combination switch .......................... 124
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 230
Convenience box ............................... 291
Convenience closing feature .............. 98
Convenience opening feature ............ 98
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 315
Display message ............................ 258
Filling capacity ............................... 391
Important safety notes .................. 390
Temperature (on-board computer,
AMG vehicles) ................................ 242
Temperature gauge ........................ 226
Warning lamp ................................. 280
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 29
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 255
Function/notes ............................. 125
Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 128
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 179
Cruise control lever ....................... 179
Deactivating ................................... 180
Display message ............................ 266
Driving system ............................... 178
Function/notes ............................. 178
Important safety notes .................. 178
Setting a speed .............................. 180
7
8
Index
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 179
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 293
Center console in the rear compartment ........................................ 294
Important safety notes .................. 293
Rear compartment ......................... 294
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 27
Customer Relations Department ....... 27
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 257
Function/notes ............................. 122
Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 238
Declarations of conformity ................. 26
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 239
Interior lighting .............................. 240
Diagnostics connection ...................... 26
Digital speedometer ......................... 230
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 158
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 316
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 245
Driving systems ............................. 261
Engine ............................................ 258
General notes ................................ 245
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 245
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 272
Lights ............................................. 255
Safety systems .............................. 246
SmartKey ....................................... 272
Tires ............................................... 267
Vehicle ........................................... 270
Distance recorder ............................. 229
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 282
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 74
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating ....................................... 183
Activation conditions ..................... 183
Deactivating ................................... 187
Display message ............................ 264
Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 186
Function/notes ............................. 181
Important safety notes .................. 181
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 185
Stopping ........................................ 185
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 240
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 91
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 84
Control panel ................................... 41
Display message ............................ 271
Emergency locking ........................... 92
Emergency unlocking ....................... 92
Important safety notes .................... 90
Opening (from inside) ...................... 90
Drinking and driving ......................... 173
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 164
Display ........................................... 157
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 158
Manual ........................................... 164
Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 165
Manual (vehicles with Sports
package AMG) ............................... 165
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 242
Drive program selector ..................... 163
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 317
Driving on flooded roads .................. 177
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 79
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 71
Index
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 71
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS ................................................ 73
Distance warning function ............... 74
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 78
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 75
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ........................................... 76
Important safety information ........... 70
Overview .......................................... 70
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 79
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 209
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 218
Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 218
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 221
Active Parking Assist ..................... 200
AIRMATIC ...................................... 193
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 195
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 213
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 214
Cruise control ................................ 178
Display message ............................ 261
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 181
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 189
HOLD function ............................... 191
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 216
Lane Tracking package .................. 214
PARKTRONIC ................................. 197
RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 192
Rear view camera .......................... 205
Driving tips
AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 176
Automatic transmission ................. 161
Brakes ........................................... 175
Break-in period .............................. 148
Downhill gradient ........................... 175
Drinking and driving ....................... 173
Driving in winter ............................. 177
Driving on flooded roads ................ 177
Driving on wet roads ...................... 177
Exhaust check ............................... 173
Fuel ................................................
General ..........................................
Hydroplaning .................................
Icy road surfaces ...........................
Limited braking efficiency on salted roads .......................................
Snow chains ..................................
Wet road surface ...........................
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) .....
173
173
177
177
175
347
175
233
E
E10
see Fuel
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 240
Function/notes ............................. 115
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 116
Function/notes ............................. 115
Switching on/off ........................... 240
EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 291
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message ............................ 248
Function/notes ................................ 78
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 174
On-board computer ....................... 230
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 154
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 153
Deactivating/activating ................. 154
General information ....................... 153
Important safety notes .................. 153
Introduction ................................... 153
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 92
Fuel filler flap ................................. 169
Trunk ............................................... 96
Vehicle ............................................. 92
9
10
Index
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 379
Important safety notes .................. 379
Removing ....................................... 380
Storage location ............................ 380
Stowing .......................................... 380
Technical data ............................... 382
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 59
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 23
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 280
Display message ............................ 258
ECO start/stop function ................ 153
Engine number ............................... 386
Irregular running ............................ 156
Jump-starting ................................. 335
Starting problems .......................... 156
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 152
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 152
Switching off .................................. 171
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 340
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 156
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 314
Additives ........................................ 389
Checking the oil level ..................... 313
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 313
Display message ............................ 260
Filling capacity ............................... 389
Notes about oil grades ................... 389
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 313
Temperature (on-board computer,
AMG vehicles) ................................ 242
Viscosity ........................................ 390
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating (except
AMG vehicles) .................................. 76
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer, except AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 235
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 242
Characteristics ................................. 76
Deactivating/activating (button
in AMG vehicles) .............................. 77
Display message ............................ 246
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 76
Function/notes ................................ 75
General notes .................................. 75
Important safety information ........... 76
Warning lamp ................................. 277
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 76
Exhaust check ................................... 173
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 322
Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 122
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 116
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 117
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 241
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 117
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 117
Setting ........................................... 117
Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 119
Storing the parking position .......... 118
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 287
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
Flat tire
MOExtended tires ..........................
Preparing the vehicle .....................
TIREFIT kit ......................................
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ...........................................
Frequencies
Mobile phone .................................
Two-way radio ................................
Fuel
Additives ........................................
Consumption statistics ..................
327
327
328
310
384
384
389
230
Index
Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 230
Displaying the range ...................... 230
Driving tips .................................... 173
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 388
Important safety notes .................. 387
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline ................................................. 388
Problem (malfunction) ................... 170
Refueling ........................................ 167
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 388
Fuel filler flap
Emergency release ........................ 169
Opening ......................................... 168
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 230
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 388
Problem (malfunction) ................... 170
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 326
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 340
Before changing ............................. 340
Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 341
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 341
Important safety notes .................. 340
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 310
General notes ................................ 307
Important safety notes .................. 307
Opening/closing the garage door .. 309
Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 307
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 308
Gear indicator (on-board computer, AMG vehicles) ......................... 242
Genuine parts ...................................... 22
Glove box ........................................... 287
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 124
Head bags
Display message ............................ 252
Head restraints
Adjusting ....................................... 108
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 109
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 109
Luxury ............................................ 109
see NECK-PRO head restraints
see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Headlamps
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 391
Fogging up ..................................... 127
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 125
Display message ............................ 256
Switching on/off ........................... 124
Hill start assist .................................. 152
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 191
Deactivating ................................... 192
Display message ............................ 262
Function/notes ............................. 191
Hood
Closing ........................................... 313
Display message ............................ 271
Important safety notes .................. 312
Opening ......................................... 312
Horn ...................................................... 32
Hydroplaning ..................................... 177
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 81
Indicator and warning lamps
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS .............................................. 282
11
12
Index
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 33
Settings ......................................... 238
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 238
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 127
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 240
Emergency lighting ........................ 128
Manual control ............................... 128
Overview ........................................ 127
Reading lamp ................................. 127
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 239
Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) .. 238
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 239
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 326
Using ............................................. 368
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 335
K
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 150
SmartKey ....................................... 149
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 99
Deactivation ..................................... 85
Display message ............................ 272
Locking ............................................ 85
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 151
Start/Stop button .......................... 150
Starting the engine ........................ 152
Unlocking ......................................... 85
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 162
Manual drive program .................... 166
Knee bag .............................................. 52
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating .................
Display message ............................
Function/information ....................
Lane Tracking package .....................
Lap time (RACETIMER) ......................
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................
License plate lamp (display message) ...................................................
Light function, active
Display message ............................
Light sensor (display message) .......
Lights
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off .......
Adaptive Highbeam Assist .............
Automatic headlamp mode ............
Cornering light function .................
Hazard warning lamps ...................
High beam flasher ..........................
High-beam headlamps ...................
Light switch ...................................
Low-beam headlamps ....................
Parking lamps ................................
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board computer) .............................................
Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) ..
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) .........
Standing lamps ..............................
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) .............................................
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) ..........
Turn signals ...................................
237
263
216
214
242
66
256
257
257
240
125
122
125
124
124
124
122
123
123
239
238
239
123
238
239
239
124
Index
see Interior lighting
Loading guidelines ............................ 286
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 91
Emergency locking ........................... 92
From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 91
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 240
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 255
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 110
Luxury head restraints ..................... 109
M
M+S tires ............................................
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
mbrace
Call priority ....................................
Display message ............................
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) .....................................
Downloading routes .......................
Emergency call ..............................
General notes ................................
Geo fencing ...................................
Locating a stolen vehicle ...............
MB info call button ........................
Remote fault diagnosis ..................
Remote vehicle locking ..................
Roadside Assistance button ..........
Search & Send ...............................
Self-test .........................................
Speed alert ....................................
System ..........................................
Triggering the vehicle alarm ...........
Vehicle remote unlocking ..............
346
320
302
249
303
306
300
299
306
305
302
305
304
301
303
299
306
299
307
304
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 86
Inserting .......................................... 87
Locking vehicle ................................ 92
Removing ......................................... 86
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 92
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the
center console ............................... 288
see Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) ......................... 233
Memory function ............................... 119
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera .................................. 209
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 218
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 221
Active Parking Assist ..................... 200
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 213
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 214
Cruise control ................................ 178
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 181
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 189
General notes ................................ 178
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 216
PARKTRONIC ................................. 197
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 63
Rear view camera .......................... 205
Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 245
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Frequencies ................................... 384
Installation ..................................... 384
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233
Transmission output (maximum) .... 384
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 86
MOExtended tires .............................. 327
13
14
Index
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 371
Mounting a new wheel ................... 371
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 368
Raising the vehicle ......................... 368
Removing a wheel .......................... 370
Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 368
MP3
Operation ....................................... 233
see separate operating instructions
Multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 110
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 229
Permanent display ......................... 238
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 227
Overview .......................................... 35
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 231
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation ......................................... 61
Resetting triggered .......................... 61
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes .................... 61
Operation ......................................... 61
Resetting when triggered ................. 62
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 148
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions .......................................
Faults ...............................................
Operation .........................................
System self-test ...............................
Occupant safety
Automatic measures after an accident .................................................
Children in the vehicle .....................
Important safety notes ....................
Introduction to the restraint system ..................................................
53
58
54
56
63
64
45
44
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 53
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 45
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 70
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 63
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 53
Faults ............................................... 58
Operation ......................................... 54
System self-test ............................... 56
Odometer ........................................... 229
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 242
Assistance menu ........................... 235
Audio menu ................................... 232
Convenience submenu .................. 240
Display messages .......................... 245
Displaying a service message ........ 316
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186
Factory settings submenu ............. 241
Important safety notes .................. 226
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238
Lighting submenu .......................... 238
Menu overview .............................. 229
Message memory .......................... 245
Navigation menu ............................ 231
Operation ....................................... 227
RACETIMER ................................... 242
Service menu ................................. 237
Settings menu ............................... 237
Standard display ............................ 229
Telephone menu ............................ 233
Trip menu ...................................... 229
Vehicle submenu ........................... 240
Video DVD operation ..................... 233
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Important safety notes .................... 25
Operating system
see On-board computer
Index
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 23
Outside temperature display ........... 227
Overhead control panel ...................... 40
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 69
P
Paint code number ............................ 386
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 319
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 170
Parking brake ................................ 172
Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 118
Rear view camera .......................... 205
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 200
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 248
Notes/function .............................. 172
Warning lamp ................................. 275
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 123
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 199
Driving system ............................... 197
Function/notes ............................. 197
Important safety notes .................. 197
Problem (malfunction) ................... 200
Range of the sensors ..................... 198
Warning display ............................. 199
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 254
Problems (malfunction) .................. 254
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Indicator lamp .................................. 45
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 322
Power washers .................................. 319
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 249
Operation ......................................... 62
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Display message ............................ 250
Function/notes ................................ 79
Important safety notes .................... 79
Warning lamp ................................. 282
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Display message ............................ 250
Operation ......................................... 63
Program selector button .................. 162
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81
Immobilizer ...................................... 81
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 22
Pulling away
General notes ................................ 152
Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 152
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 28
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
R
RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 192
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 242
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 232
see separate operating instructions
Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Reading lamp ..................................... 127
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 146
Setting the airflow ......................... 142
15
16
Index
Setting the temperature ................ 141
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 256
Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 290
Rear seats
Display message ............................ 271
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 321
Displays in the Audio display ......... 206
Displays in the COMAND display ... 206
Function/notes ............................. 205
Switching on/off ........................... 205
Rear window blind ............................ 296
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 144
Switching on/off ........................... 143
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 117
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system)
Important safety notes .................. 392
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 167
Refueling process .......................... 168
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 307
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 307
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 128
Reporting safety defects .................... 27
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 261
Warning lamp ................................. 280
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 144
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 252
Introduction ..................................... 44
Warning lamp ................................. 279
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 157
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 97
Sliding sunroof ............................... 101
Trunk lid ........................................... 93
Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 256
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24
Roller sunblind
Rear window .................................. 296
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 324
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 392
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 64
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 49
Adjusting the height ......................... 48
Cleaning ......................................... 324
Correct usage .................................. 47
Fastening ......................................... 48
Important safety guidelines ............. 46
Introduction ..................................... 46
Releasing ......................................... 49
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 241
Warning lamp ................................. 274
Warning lamp (function) ................... 49
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 110
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat ............................................... 110
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 108
Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 110
Cleaning the cover ......................... 323
Correct driver's seat position ........ 106
Important safety notes .................. 107
Overview ........................................ 107
Seat heating problem .................... 112
Seat ventilation problem ................ 113
Index
Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 119
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 112
Section
Trunk ............................................... 92
Securing cargo .................................. 290
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 323
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 321
Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 237
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 390
Coolant (engine) ............................ 390
Engine oil ....................................... 389
Fuel ................................................ 387
Important safety notes .................. 387
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 392
Washer fluid ................................... 391
Setting the air distribution ............... 141
Setting the airflow ............................ 142
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 241
On-board computer ....................... 237
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 242
Side impact air bag ............................. 52
Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 257
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 320
Convenience closing feature ............ 98
Convenience opening feature .......... 98
Important safety information ........... 97
Opening/closing .............................. 97
Problem (malfunction) ................... 100
Resetting ......................................... 99
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................. 100
Opening/closing ............................ 101
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103
Resetting ....................................... 102
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 87
Changing the programming ............. 86
Checking the battery ....................... 87
Convenience closing feature ............ 99
Convenience opening feature .......... 98
Display message ............................ 272
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 84
Important safety notes .................... 84
Loss ................................................. 89
Mechanical key ................................ 86
Overview .......................................... 84
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 149
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Starting the engine ........................ 152
Snow chains ...................................... 347
Sockets
Center console .............................. 298
General notes ................................ 298
Rear compartment ......................... 299
Spare wheel
Stowing .......................................... 380
Special seat belt retractor .................. 64
Specialist workshop ............................ 26
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 230
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33
Segments ...................................... 227
Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 238
see Instrument cluster
SPORT handling mode
Activating/deactivating (AMG
vehicles) .......................................... 77
Warning lamp ................................. 278
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 256
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 151
Steering (display message) .............. 272
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
(DISTRONIC PLUS)
Activating/deactivating ................. 236
Display message ............................ 266
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 113
Button overview ............................... 35
17
18
Index
Buttons (on-board computer) .........
Cleaning .........................................
Important safety notes ..................
Paddle shifters ...............................
Steering wheel heating ..................
Storing settings (memory function) ...............................................
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ...................
Switching on/off ...........................
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...................
Stowage areas ...................................
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) .............................
Center console ..............................
Center console (rear) .....................
Cup holders ...................................
Eyeglasses compartment ...............
Glove box .......................................
Important safety information .........
Rear ...............................................
Stowage net ...................................
Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat ..............................
Stowage net .......................................
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor ....................................................
Summer tires .....................................
Sun visor ............................................
Surround lighting (on-board computer) ..................................................
Suspension tuning
AIRMATIC ......................................
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ...........................................
SETUP (on-board computer) ..........
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off .................................................
227
323
113
163
114
119
115
114
163
242
286
288
288
289
293
287
287
286
289
289
288
289
292
346
295
239
194
195
242
144
T
Tachometer ........................................ 226
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 256
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 387
Emergency spare wheel ................. 382
Information .................................... 384
Tires/wheels ................................. 372
Vehicle data ................................... 392
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 234
Display message ............................ 272
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233
Number from the phone book ........ 234
Redialing ........................................ 234
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 234
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 226
Coolant (on-board computer,
AMG vehicles) ................................ 242
Engine oil (on-board computer,
AMG vehicles) ................................ 242
Outside temperature ...................... 227
Setting (climate control) ................ 141
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 242
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 352
Checking manually ........................ 351
Display message ............................ 267
Maximum ....................................... 350
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 330
Notes ............................................. 349
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 330
Recommended ............................... 348
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................ 351
Important safety notes .................. 351
Restarting ...................................... 352
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ 354
Function/notes ............................. 352
General notes ................................ 352
Important safety notes .................. 352
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 355
Restarting ...................................... 355
Warning lamp ................................. 283
Warning message .......................... 354
Index
Tire-change tool kit ...........................
TIREFIT kit ..........................................
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) .................
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) ....................
Bar (definition) ...............................
Changing a wheel ..........................
Characteristics ..............................
Checking ........................................
Curb weight (definition) .................
Definition of terms .........................
Direction of rotation ......................
Display message ............................
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................
DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) .............................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ...............................................
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) .....................................
General notes ................................
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ...........................................
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ..............................
Important safety notes ..................
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ......
Information on driving ....................
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...........
Labeling (overview) ........................
Load bearing index (definition) ......
Load index .....................................
Load index (definition) ...................
Maximum load on a tire (definition) ...............................................
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) .............................
Maximum tire load .........................
Maximum tire load (definition) .......
MOExtended tires ..........................
Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................
326
328
366
365
364
367
364
345
366
364
367
267
367
365
364
365
372
365
365
344
365
344
365
361
366
363
365
366
365
366
363
366
346
366
PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 366
Replacing ....................................... 367
Service life ..................................... 346
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 366
Speed rating (definition) ................ 365
Storing ........................................... 367
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 364
Temperature .................................. 360
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 366
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 366
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 366
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 365
Tire size (data) ............................... 372
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 361
Tire tread ....................................... 345
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 366
Total load limit (definition) ............. 367
Traction ......................................... 360
Traction (definition) ....................... 366
Tread wear ..................................... 360
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 359
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 365
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 366
Wheel and tire combination ........... 374
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 365
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 67
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 340
Important safety notes .................. 337
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 337
Installing the towing eye ................ 338
Removing the towing eye ............... 339
With both axles on the ground ....... 339
With the rear axle raised ................ 339
Towing eye ......................................... 326
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 158
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 158
19
20
Index
Transporting the vehicle .................. 339
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 323
Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 230
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 229
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 231
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 96
Important safety notes .................... 92
Locking separately ........................... 96
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 95
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 94
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 93
Trunk lid
Display message ............................ 271
Opening dimensions ...................... 392
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 392
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 255
Switching on/off ........................... 124
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 384
Installation ..................................... 384
Transmission output (maximum) .... 384
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 92
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 91
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 295
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 270
Equipment ....................................... 23
Individual settings .......................... 237
Limited Warranty ............................. 27
Loading .......................................... 355
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 92
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 84
Lowering ........................................ 371
Maintenance .................................... 24
Parking for a long period ................ 172
Pulling away ................................... 152
Raising ........................................... 368
Reporting problems ......................... 27
Securing from rolling away ............ 368
Towing away .................................. 337
Transporting .................................. 339
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 92
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 84
Vehicle data ................................... 392
Vehicle data ....................................... 392
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 392
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 92
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 386
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC ...................................... 193
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 262
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 326
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 233
VIN
Seat ............................................... 386
Type plate ...................................... 386
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 276
Brakes ........................................... 275
Check Engine ................................. 280
Coolant .......................................... 280
Distance warning ........................... 282
ESP® .............................................. 277
ESP® OFF ....................................... 278
Fuel tank ........................................ 280
General notes ................................ 274
Overview .......................................... 34
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 45
Index
Reserve fuel ................................... 280
Restraint system ............................ 279
Seat belt ........................................ 274
SPORT handling mode ................... 278
Tire pressure monitor .................... 283
Warranty .............................................. 23
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 272
Wheel and tire combination
see Tires
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 371
Wheel chock ...................................... 368
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 367
Checking ........................................ 345
Cleaning ......................................... 320
Emergency spare wheel ................. 379
General notes ................................ 372
Important safety notes .................. 344
Information on driving .................... 344
Interchanging/changing ................ 367
Mounting a new wheel ................... 371
Mounting a wheel .......................... 368
Removing a wheel .......................... 370
Storing ........................................... 367
Tightening torque ........................... 371
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 372
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 53
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 142
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 315
Important safety notes .................. 391
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 130
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 129
Switching on/off ........................... 128
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 346
Slippery road surfaces ................... 177
Snow chains .................................. 347
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 346
Wiper blades
Cleaning .........................................
Important safety notes ..................
Replacing .......................................
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ..................................................
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
321
129
129
323
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 142
21
22
Introduction
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating
conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Ralways
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Ravoid
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Rswitch
Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
environmental rules and regulations when
disposing of materials. In this way you will
help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor
pillars
sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Rdoor
Introduction
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should
therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 386).
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
in accordance with the warranty terms and
conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
Operator's Manual
Vehicle Limited Warranty
System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment
i Should you lose your Service and War-
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RNew
REmission
ranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to
you.
Z
23
24
Introduction
Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or
more substantial defects or malfunctions in
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or
more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing
of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified
us in writing of the need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty
booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
Introduction
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice
facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe through our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
heavy object strikes the undercarriage
or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
Ra
Z
25
26
Introduction
an accident, no longer withstand the strain
they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If
these materials come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch
fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the
vehicle immediately, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. In such cases,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is
used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Introduction
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork
relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and modifications
Rwork on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
Rthe
safety notes in this manual
vehicle technical data
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Rthe
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Z
27
28
Introduction
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form,
e.g. the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under https://
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
content/asportal/en/communication/
informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic
information relating to vehicle operation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include
information about the performance or status
of various systems, including but not limited
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with
suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
to further optimize and develop vehicle functions.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain
situations, and the location of the vehicle may
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace
system.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as during air bag deployment or when
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
Rhow
various systems in your vehicle are
operating
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, can
combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing
the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Introduction
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the
Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
29
30
31
Cockpit ................................................. 32
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
Center console .................................... 37
Overhead control panel ...................... 40
Door control panel .............................. 41
At a glance
Instrument cluster .............................. 33
32
Cockpit
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
Page
:
Steering wheel paddle
shifters
163
;
Combination switch
124
=
Instrument cluster
33
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever
158
B
PARKTRONIC warning display
C
Function
Page
F
Adjusts the steering wheel
manually
113
G
Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically
Steering wheel heating
113
114
H
Cruise control lever
179
I
Parking brake
172
197
J
Diagnostics connection
Overhead control panel
40
K
Opens the hood
312
D
Climate control systems
132
L
Releases the parking brake
172
E
Ignition lock
Start/Stop button
149
150
M
Light switch
122
26
Instrument cluster
33
Instrument cluster
Function
At a glance
Displays
Page
:
Speedometer with segments
227
;
Multifunction display
229
=
Tachometer
226
?
Coolant temperature
226
Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be
found under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 227).
i Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting
using the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
Function
A
Fuel gage
Fuel filler flap location indicator 8: the fuel filler
cap is on the right-hand
side.
Page
34
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function
:
Page
Function
Page
G
ü Seat belt
274
H
÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles
278
I
? Coolant
280
J
K High-beam headlamps
124
K
L Low-beam headlamps
123
275
L
T Parking lamps
123
276
M
R This lamp has no function
N
8 Reserve fuel
÷ ESP®
M SPORT handling
mode in AMG vehicles
277
;
· Distance warning
282
=
å ESP® OFF
277
?
#! Turn signals
124
A
$ Brakes (USA only)
275
B
J Brakes (Canada only)
C
! ABS
D
6 Restraint system
E
; Check Engine
280
F
h Tire pressure monitor
283
278
44
280
Multifunction steering wheel
35
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Multifunction display
;
Audio 20 or COMAND display (see the separate operating instructions)
Page
229
Function
=
?
Vehicles with Audio 20:
switches on voice-operated
control for navigation (see
manufacturer's operating
instructions)
Vehicles with COMAND:
switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or ends a call
Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial memory
Page
233
36
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Function
?
=;
Selects a menu
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists
a
Confirms a selection
Hides display messages
%
Back
Vehicles with Audio 20:
switches off voice-operated
control of the navigation
(see manufacturer's operating instructions)
Vehicles with COMAND:
switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)
Page
227
227
227
245
227
Center console
37
Center console
Function
:
At a glance
Center console, upper section
Page
Audio system or COMAND
(see the separate operating
instructions)
;
c Seat heating
111
=
s Seat ventilation
112
?
c PARKTRONIC
197
A
¤ ECO start/stop function (AMG vehicles)
153
Function
Page
B
4 5 Indicator lamp
C
£ Hazard warning
lamps
124
D
u Roller sunblind in the
rear window
296
54
38
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function
E
Page
Stowage compartment
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
Cup holder
286
296
297
298
293
F
Cup holder
293
G
e Sets the suspension
tuning
194
Function
Page
H
É Sets the vehicle level
193
I
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
288
J
Ú Selects the drive program
162
K
Audio or COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions)
Center console
39
At a glance
Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)
Function
Page
F
Cup holder
293
G
Engages park position P
171
H
Selector lever
157
I
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Socket
296
297
298
J
Audio or COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions)
Function
Page
K
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
288
L
ß Calls up or saves the
suspension setting
195
M
à Sets the suspension
tuning
195
N
å ESP®
O
Drive program selector
77
163
40
Overhead control panel
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function
Page
:
u Switches the rear
interior lighting on/off
;
| Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off
128
=
p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off
127
?
ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system)
302
A
3 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof
101
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
300
Rear-view mirror
117
B
C
128
Function
Page
D
Buttons for the garage door
opener
E
Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)
F
F Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace system)
301
G
p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off
127
H
c Switches the front
interior lighting on/off
128
307
Door control panel
41
At a glance
Door control panel
Function
:
Page
r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and steering wheel
119
;
Adjusts the seats electrically
108
=
% & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
91
?
Opens the door
90
A
7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically
116
Function
Page
B
W Opens/closes the
side windows
97
C
n Activates/deactivates the override feature
for the side windows in the
rear compartment
69
p Opens/closes the
trunk lid
95
D
42
43
Useful information .............................. 44
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Occupant safety .................................. 44
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70
Driving safety systems ....................... 70
Protection against theft ..................... 81
Safety
Children in the vehicle ........................ 64
Occupant safety
44
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
Safety
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Panic alarm
Occupant safety
Restraint system: introduction
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of
an accident. The restraint system can also
reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
are subjected during an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
RSeat
belt system
bags
RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
RAir
Rhave
To activate: press the ! button : for
approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X To deactivate: press the ! button :
again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
X
fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 47)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (Y page 107).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 106).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 50).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
accident occurs, only the air bags that
increase protection in that particular accident
situation are deployed. However, seat belts
and air bags generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 59).
For more information about children traveling
with you in the vehicle and on child restraint
systems, see "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 64).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and
at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a
few seconds after the vehicle is started. The
components of the restraint system are in
operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
Rdoes
not light up after the ignition is
switched on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
the engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
G WARNING
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
is part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp:
Ris
lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. It will then not be deployed in
the event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed.
Z
45
Safety
Occupant safety
46
Occupant safety
Safety
Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag must either be deactivated or enabled;
see the following points. You must make sure
of this both before and during a journey.
RChildren
in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the
installed child restraint system, and the age
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to
observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) and
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64).
There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.
RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front
air bag is enabled or deactivated
(Y page 53). Be sure to observe the notes
on "Seat belts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags"
(Y page 50). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
RSeat
belts
REmergency
Tensioning Devices for the
front seat belts and the outer seat belts in
the rear
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
close against the body. However it does not
pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
of the backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
which absorb part of the deceleration force.
This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an
accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall
50 states
U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
Rthe
G WARNING
If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an
incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or when abruptly changing direc-
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat
belt.
(Y page 64) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 53)
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
G WARNING
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot
fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for
example, in an accident, during braking or an
abrupt change of direction. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint
systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
Ralways
secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section of this Operator's Manual
Rthey
are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleach or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modified
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such
modifications could invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion.
Z
47
Safety
Occupant safety
48
Occupant safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that:
Safety
Rthe
seat belt tongue is only inserted to the
belt buckle belonging to that seat.
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using
the shoulder section of the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects.
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,
store these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a
time.
Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
luggage or loads (Y page 286).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 47).
Adjust the seat (Y page 106).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
vertical position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet
= and engage belt tongue ; into belt
buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened
automatically, see "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 49).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
X
Occupant safety
To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
The belt outlet will engage in various positions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and
slide belt outlet downwards.
X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the
desired position and make sure that the
belt outlet engages.
X
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor"
(Y page 64).
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Press release button :, hold belt
tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
belt outlet =.
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This
function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the
occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Rthe
belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
and
Rthe ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
and off in the on-board computer
(Y page 241).
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may
light up continuously or flash. In addition,
there may be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If, after
six seconds, the driver or front-passenger
seat belt has not been fastened and the doors
are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up. As soon as the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are fastened or a front
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
Z
Safety
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the
shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
49
Safety
50
Occupant safety
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is
fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a
warning tone sounds. A warning tone also
sounds with increasing intensity for
60 seconds or until the driver or front
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
warning is activated again.
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
belts" (Y page 274).
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat
belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 59).
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
Rhave
fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants.
RAdjust
the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the
seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully
deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against
the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air
bags.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air
bag.
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
RAlways
secure children under twelve years
of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in
suitable child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed
on the rear seats.
ROnly
secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat when the front-passenger
front air bag is deactivated. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
permanently lit, the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated (Y page 45).
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children
in the vehicle" (Y page 64) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly.
Before starting your journey and to avoid risks
resulting from the speed of the air bag as it
deploys, make sure that:
are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side
windows, rear side trim or side walls.
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front air bags
Rthere
G WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the
occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 45).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe
system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied (Y page 53)
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not lit (Y page 54)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Z
51
Safety
Occupant safety
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Knee bags
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ;
under the glove box. The driver's and frontpassenger knee bags are triggered together
with the front air bags.
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions:
Rthe
OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not.
Pelvis air bags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the
outer seat cushions.
When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances
the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the
impact occurs.
The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of
the impact.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
does not deploy under the following conditions:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the pelvis air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not.
Rthe
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deployed in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or
arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which
the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 59).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe
side impact air bag
pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Rthe
Prerequisites
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith
the seat belt fastened correctly
an almost upright position with their
back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
Rin
Z
53
Safety
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
54
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger:
Safety
Rtransfers
GO, press the Start/Stop button once or
twice.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
be sure to observe the correct positioning of
the child restraint system. Never place
objects under or behind the child restraint
system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the
child restraint system must always rest on the
seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
backrest of the forward-facing child restraint
system must lie as flat as possible against the
backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
must light up for approximately six seconds.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
then displays the status of the frontpassenger front air bag. If the status of the
front-passenger front air bag changes while
the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display
message may appear in the instrument cluster (Y page 254). When the front-passenger
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger
front air bag both before and during the journey.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp:
Occupant Classification System operation (OCS)
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
shows you whether the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated.
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESS-
Ris
lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. It will then not be deployed in
the event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed.
passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
Occupant safety
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
off, the front-passenger front air bag can
deploy in the event of an accident. The child
could be struck by the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
event of an accident:
Rcome
into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
the system self-test and remains lit. This
indicates that the front-passenger front air
bag is deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp can go out after the system self-test.
This indicates that the front-passenger
front air bag is activated. The result of the
classification is dependent on, among
other factors, the child restraint system
and the child's stature. It is recommended
that you install the child restraint system on
a suitable rear seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager
or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit
after the system self-test depending on the
result of the classification or, alternatively,
goes out.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger
seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit
on a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the
system self-test. This indicates that the
front-passenger front air bag is activated.
Z
Safety
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
Rthe person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
55
Safety
56
Occupant safety
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64).
When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an
accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
front-passenger seat should only be repaired
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories
that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
will also deploy. The Occupant Classification
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
either enabled or deactivated.
System self-test
G DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up during the system selftest, then the system is malfunctioning. The
front-passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with
high deceleration. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
G DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
Occupant safety
Safety
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
57
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag
(Y page 54).
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 58).
Z
58
Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).
Safety
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is
BAG OFF indicator
incorrect.
lamp lights up and
X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even
son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).
though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature corMercedes-Benz Center.
responding to that of an
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
OCS is malfunctioning.
X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Runoccupied
X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Roccupied by the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the frontweight of a child up
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
to 12 months old in a
the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
child restraint system
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on
a suitable rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
G WARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
may cause short-term breathing difficulties in
people with asthma or other respiratory problems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of
the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In
California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
Rduration
Rdirection
Rintensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the
Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
Rthe
ignition is switched on
Rthe components of the restraint system are
operational; see "Restraint system warning
lamp" (Y page 45)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the respective front-passenger seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the
rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
Z
59
Safety
Occupant safety
Safety
60
Occupant safety
the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated
or deactivated depending on the person on
the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger front air bag can only deploy in an
accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(Y page 45).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
During the first deployment stage, the front
air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce
the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully
deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold
is reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. Deployment should take
place in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by:
Rthe
distribution of forces during the collision
Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
deceleration occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the
applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each
other depending on the apparent type of accident.
RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on
the side of impact, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use
of the seat belt on the driver's seat and
outer seats in the second row
- the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or
- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of
impact, independently of the use of the
seat belt and independently of whether the
front-passenger seat is occupied
REmergency Tensioning Device, if the system determines that deployment can offer
additional protection in this situation
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or
acceleration and the apparent type of accident:
Rfrontal
collision
impact
Rrollover
Rside
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
Ruse head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint covers.
protection will not be available in the event of
another rear-end collision. You can see that a
NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraint has been triggered if it is tilted
forward and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the functionality of the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a rear-end collision.
Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head
restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint
NECK-PRO head restraints
Rattach
Method of operation
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints offer additional protection
against head and neck injuries. In the event of
a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECKPRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
seats are moved forwards and upwards. This
provides better head support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints have been triggered in
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's seat and the front-passenger
seat (Y page 61). Otherwise, the additional
Do not insert your finger between the cushion
of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO head restraints.
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO head restraint cushion backwards in
the direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO head restraint.
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head
Z
61
Safety
Occupant safety
62
Occupant safety
restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection system)
Introduction
Safety
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the
vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be
damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Do not insert your finger between the cushion
of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints.
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow = until it
engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
document wallet.
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of
an accident cannot be ruled out. Always
adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions and maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
understeers or oversteers severely
Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance
package: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an
imminent danger of collision in certain situations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
Rthe
front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is
in an unfavorable position.
Rthe
Occupant safety
the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
the side windows are closed so that only a
small gap remains.
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active
multicontour seat: the air pressure in the
side bolsters of the backrest is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats/active multicontour seats,
the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced
again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can
then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
X
Move the seat backrest or seat back
slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You
will find information on the convenience function under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 49).
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rearend collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes preemptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the
vehicle is backing up.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking
actions while the vehicle is in motion or when
Parking Guidance is active.
Function
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation
detected:
Rif
the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat
belts are pre-tensioned.
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
rear-end collision is imminent:
- the brake pressure is increased if the
driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary.
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is
canceled:
Rif
the accelerator pedal is depressed when
a gear is engaged
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention
to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, the original settings
are restored.
Automatic measures after an accident
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on
the type and severity of the impact:
Rthe
hazard warning lamps are activated
emergency lighting is activated
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rthe
Z
Safety
Rif
63
64
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Rvehicles
with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install a child restraint system on a
rear seat. Children are generally better protected there.
If a child under 12 years of age and under 5 ft
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
Ralways
secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes in this section in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 53)
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
Rshift
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be
paid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 47).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a three-point seat belt fits properly without a
booster seat.
Special seat belt retractor
G WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
Children in the vehicle
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken
once the child restraint system has been
secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
outlet.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
X
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is activated.
X Push the child seat restraint system down
so that the seat belt is tight and does not
loosen.
X
Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
X Press the release button of the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
towards the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
X
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall
50 states
U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthe
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading
guidelines" (Y page 286).
Z
Safety
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
65
Safety
66
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems are:
Rthe
seat belt system
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe
the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There you
will also find information on deactivating the
front-passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system
G WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems with which the child is also secured
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the
child restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
RU.S.
When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system, fold protective caps ; of
securing rings : inwards.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
Children in the vehicle
Safety
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount
and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this
should always be used.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
tone also sounds.
Top Tether anchorages
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
in the rear compartment behind the head
restraints.
67
Move head restraint : upwards.
Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
=.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage =.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
twisted.
X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 109).
Make sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
X
X
Z
68
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat
Safety
General notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install the child restraint system on a
rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 53).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
as a result of:
Ran
incorrectly categorized person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always make sure that
the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45)
is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a
forward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not
touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the
head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat
backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the
vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide
on the child restraint system. The shoulder
belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the
front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
Roperate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
Rthe
Rthe
rear doors (Y page 69)
rear side windows (Y page 69)
Children in the vehicle
G WARNING
69
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Safety
Rshift
You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side windows
X
To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the
rear compartment.
Z
70
Driving safety systems
Pets in the vehicle
Safety
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Ractivate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box.
Driving safety systems
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. Driving safety
systems are merely aids designed to assist
driving. You are responsible for maintaining
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there is
adequate contact between the tires and the
road surface. Please pay special attention to
the notes on tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 344).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
systems described in this section work as
effectively as possible.
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS
(Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 70)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 71)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with
Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 71)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(distance warning function and Adaptive
Brake Assist) (Y page 73)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 75)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 78)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 79)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 79)
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 276) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 246).
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if
you only brake gently.
Braking
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
X To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
X
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with
Cross-Traffic Assist
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
the Driving Assistance package.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system and the camera system
must be operational.
With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
Rthat
are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time
Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours
and posture of a person standing upright.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions
are restricted or no longer available. The
brake system is still available with complete
brake boosting effect and BAS.
Z
71
Safety
Driving safety systems
72
Driving safety systems
i Observe the restrictions described in the
Safety
"Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 72).
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are
assisted when braking.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
Rintervene
unnecessarily
intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Rnot
G WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
Rto
small people, e.g. children
animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rwhen cornering
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Rto
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere
are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra
narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
Rdirt
on the camera or if the camera is covered
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
from the sun being low in the sky
Rdarkness
Rif:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
- the camera system no longer recognizes
a pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
- a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
- the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if:
Ryou
approach an obstacle, and
PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment.
RBAS
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within
a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
155 mph (250 km/h).
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:
Rstationary
objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Robjects crossing your path and that are
recognized in the detection range of the
sensors
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high
braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously.
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the
effects of such a collision.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically. If you
do not react to the visual and audible collision
warning, autonomous braking can be initiated
in critical situations. If you apply the brake
yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake
Assist assists you.
Activating or deactivating
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
activated after every ignition cycle. You can
activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer
(Y page 236). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous
braking function are also deactivated.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the
assistance graphics display.
Important safety notes
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if:
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Ryou
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
release the brake pedal.
is no longer a risk of collision.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Ryou activate kickdown.
Rthere
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
General information
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an
autonomous braking function and adaptive
Brake Assist.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can
help you to minimize the risk of a front-end
covering the sensors
is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 148).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to colliRthere
Z
73
Safety
Driving safety systems
74
Driving safety systems
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Safety
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
a collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 70).
G WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Rto
G WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.
Rnot
Function
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
the distance warning function warns you if
you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a
warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),
the distance warning function can also react
to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance
warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist
with the autonomous braking function.
The autonomous braking function:
Rgives
the driver more time to react to critical driving situations
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
Rreduces the effects of an accident
The autonomous braking function is available
in the following speed ranges:
Rfrom
4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph
(105 km/h) for moving objects
Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph
(50 km/h) for stationary objects
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)
are activated simultaneously.
Adaptive Brake Assist
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds
above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor
technology to assess the traffic situation.
G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
Rintervene
unnecessarily
Rnot intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Rto
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the
distance warning signal can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates
the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase
the braking force to a level suitable for the
traffic conditions.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou
release the brake pedal.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rno
obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
over the period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
stationary obstacles.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
Z
75
Safety
Driving safety systems
76
Driving safety systems
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
Safety
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
G WARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
formance tests may only be carried out on
a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate
the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please
consult a qualified workshop. You could
otherwise damage the drive train or the
brake system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
on ESP® (Y page 339) when towing the vehicle with a raised rear axle.
ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning
lamp is lit continuously.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 277) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 246).
i Only use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states
of ESP®:
RESP®
RESP®
is activated.
is deactivated.
Driving safety systems
Rtraction
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
ESP®
extended period with
deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
control is still activated.
still provides support when you
brake.
RESP®
Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG
vehicles)
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states
of ESP®:
RESP®
is activated.
handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
RSPORT
G WARNING
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
starts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
ESP®
You can deactivate or activate
on-board computer (Y page 235).
ESP® deactivated:
via the
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
ESP® activated:
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
no longer improves driving stability.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following.
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP®:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Ron specially designated roads when the
vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and
experienced driver.
Rin
Z
Safety
G WARNING
RESP®
77
Driving safety systems
78
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
Safety
ESP®
described above no longer apply.
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
starts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
RESP®
only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.
Rtraction control is still activated.
Rengine torque is restricted to a limited
degree and the drive wheels are able to
spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
To activate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message
appears in the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
X
To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display.
X
To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON
message appears in the multifunction display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
limited degree.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP®
no longer improves driving stability.
torque is restricted to a limited
degree and the drive wheels are able to
spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
intervenes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it
is also not activated if you brake firmly and
ESP® intervenes.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Rengine
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability while braking.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 70).
G WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 276) as well as display messages (Y page 248).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
also has the HOLD function (Y page 191) and
hill start assist (Y page 152).
PRE-SAFE® Brake
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing
upright.
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 79).
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a
risk of collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a
danger of collision is detected. There may be
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
after subsequent full application of the brakes
a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
General information
G WARNING
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions.
tion (Y page 70).
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera
system must be switched on and be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system and
the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can
detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Z
79
Safety
Driving safety systems
Safety
80
Driving safety systems
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
automatically under the following conditions:
Rthe
driver and front-passenger have their
seat belts fastened
and
Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
(200 km/h)
At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:
Rstationary
objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
Rto
small people, e.g. children
animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Rto
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
Rdirt
on the camera or if the camera is covered
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
from the sun being low in the sky
Rdarkness
Rif:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
- the camera system no longer recognizes
a pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
- a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
- the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board
computer (Y page 236).
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent
warning tone will then sound and the ·
distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster.
Protection against theft
Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X
i The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRESAFE®) are activated.
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking,
up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed
until immediately prior to an imminent accident.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by:
the accelerator pedal further.
kickdown.
Rreleasing the brake pedal.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
ended automatically if:
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Rdepressing
Ractivating
Ryou
maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
is no longer a risk of collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle.
Rthere
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey
has been left inside the vehicle.
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra
door
vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
X To switch the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
Rthe
Z
Safety
X
81
Protection against theft
82
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
Safety
X
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:
Ryou
have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
83
Useful information .............................. 84
SmartKey ............................................. 84
Doors .................................................... 90
Trunk .................................................... 92
Side windows ...................................... 97
Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof .................................. 100
84
SmartKey
Useful information
Opening and closing
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith
electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
SmartKey functions
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
: & To lock the vehicle
; F To unlock the trunk lid
= % To unlock the vehicle
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe
doors
trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
Rthe
SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period.
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 98).
X
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
using the & button on the SmartKey.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
the distance between the SmartKey and the
corresponding door handle must not be
greater than 3 ft (1 m).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
Rwhen
the external door handles are
touched
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
X
To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
the trunk lid.
The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a key for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
SmartKey will then use very little power,
thereby conserving battery power. For the
purposes of activation/deactivation, the
vehicle must not be nearby.
X To deactivate: press the & button on
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
(Y page 87) flashes twice briefly and
lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X To activate: press any button on the
SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.
Z
Opening and closing
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 240).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 239).
85
SmartKey
86
Opening and closing
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons on the
SmartKey simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check
lamp flashes twice (Y page 87).
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks
or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
(Y page 81).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X
or
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
X
To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes
twice (Y page 87).
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
X
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
To deactivate the alarm with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
or
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the
vehicle.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
SmartKey
X
Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
Runlocking
the driver's door (Y page 92)
the trunk (Y page 96)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 92)
87
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 86).
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into
the SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Checking the battery
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 87).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
X
Rlocks
or
Runlocks
the vehicle
i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
X
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then
press to close it.
Z
Opening and closing
Runlocking
SmartKey
88
Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
X
SmartKey
89
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necusing KEYLESS-GO.
essary (Y page 87).
If this does not work:
Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
You have lost a SmartKey.
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
X
Z
Opening and closing
You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necusing the SmartKey.
essary (Y page 87).
Opening and closing
90
Doors
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
the on-board voltage is too low.
X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 333).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
The vehicle is locked.
started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
Rshifting
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 286).
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 81).
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 69).
X
To unlock a front door: pull door handle ;.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a front door: pull door handle ;.
X
To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, it cannot be centrally unlocked from the
inside.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 69).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe
vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside
is unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside.
To deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X
X
i If you press one of the two buttons and do
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
Z
91
Opening and closing
Doors
Trunk
92
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
Rthe
vehicle is being pushed.
vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 240).
Opening and closing
Rthe
Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 86).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
Open the driver's door.
Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the trunk lid.
X Press the locking button (Y page 91).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs by hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 86).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
X
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
are locked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
X
X
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
X
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 81).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Trunk
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
Trunk
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 392).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 286).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Vehicles without the trunk lid remote
closing feature: the trunk lid can be:
Ropened
and closed manually from outside
automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
Ropened
Ropened
your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it is
closing.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
Rover
the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
Rpull
or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid, or
Rpull on the trunk lid handle
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
and closed manually from outside
Ropened and closed automatically from out-
side
Ropened
and closed automatically from
inside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Pull handle :.
X Raise the trunk lid.
X
Trunk lid reversing feature
The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the
closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for
X
Z
Opening and closing
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
93
Trunk
94
Opening and closing
Closing
Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
button on the SmartKey (Y page 84) or with
KEYLESS-GO (Y page 85).
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
X
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
will open again.
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
the F button on the SmartKey.
or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
Rpull the trunk lid handle
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 392).
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically
using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk
lid.
X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
or
X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and release it again immediately
(Y page 93).
Closing
Rpress
Rpull
Example: closing and locking button (vehicle with
the trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESSGO)
X
To close: press closing button : in the
trunk lid.
Trunk
X
Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the
trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is
closed.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey
outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains
closed.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 392).
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
the F button on the SmartKey.
or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
Rpull the trunk lid handle
Opening and closing
Rpress
Rpull
G WARNING
The trunk lid can be automatically opened or
closed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could activate the functions.
There is a risk of injury.
To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
X To close: press remote operating switch
for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely closed.
X
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
Z
Opening and closing
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
95
Trunk
96
Opening and closing
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
X Close the trunk lid.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 86).
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to
position 2.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
position 1 to position 2.
X Remove the mechanical key.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
X
Trunk emergency release
You can open the trunk lid from inside the
vehicle with the emergency release button.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered (Y page 81).
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 86).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened
with the trunk lid emergency release when
the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged.
Side windows
Remergency
release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
Rover
the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side windows
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
:
;
=
?
Front left
Front right
Rear right
Rear left
Z
Opening and closing
Trunk lid emergency release light:
97
Side windows
98
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch.
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull and hold the corresponding switch.
X To close fully: pull the corresponding
switch beyond the pressure point.
Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt automatic operation:
press/pull the corresponding switch again.
i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
SmartKey must be in close proximity to the
vehicle.
Opening and closing
X
i You can continue to operate the side win-
dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
i When the override feature for the side
windows is activated (Y page 69), the side
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
Convenience opening
i The "convenience opening" feature is also
available on unlocked vehicles.
Convenience opening
Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are in
the desired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
X
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
Information on the side window reversing feature (Y page 97).
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
With the SmartKey:
General notes
X
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions simultaneously:
X
Runlock
the vehicle
the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat
Ropen
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
Release the & button.
Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel open again.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Release the sensor surface on the door
handle.
X Pull the door handle immediately and hold
it.
The side windows and the sliding sunroof or
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel open.
X
Side windows
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:
Rclose
Rclose
the side windows
the sliding sunroof
Using the SmartKey
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the
tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on
the driver's door.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
X
Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are
fully closed.
X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The
gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater
than 3 ft (1 m).
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
X
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 97).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 97).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly. If
this is not the case, repeat the steps above
again.
X
Z
Opening and closing
General notes
99
100
Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows
Opening and closing
G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
Remove the objects.
X Close the side window.
X
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
G WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Sliding sunroof
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
If somebody becomes trapped:
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
Opening and closing
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.
Rrelease
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
Rover
the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
101
Overhead control panel
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
X
i The automatic opening and raising fea-
ture is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
or close the sun protection cover manually
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
i You can continue to operate the sliding
sunroof after switching off the engine or
Z
102
Sliding sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the ignition
lock. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
Resetting
Opening and closing
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 101).
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully opened and closed again
(Y page 101).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof
103
Problems with the sliding sunroof
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
the switch immediately, or
the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Rpress
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
not be closed and you again slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Z
Opening and closing
G WARNING
104
105
Useful information ............................ 106
Correct driver's seat position .......... 106
Seats .................................................. 107
Steering wheel .................................. 113
Mirrors ............................................... 116
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Memory function ............................... 119
106
Correct driver's seat position
Useful information
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 107).
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly.
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 108)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
X
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible
are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly
Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
Ryou can depress the pedals properly
X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by the
center of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 113).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 113)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou
Ryou
can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 46).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 48).
Seats
Rfit
snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way
that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 116).
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings with the memory function
(Y page 119).
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle"
(Y page 64).
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep
liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The seat belt should:
107
108
Seats
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i The head restraints in the front seats are
installed with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 61). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from
the front seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Adjusting the seats
:
;
=
?
A
Head restraint height
Seat cushion angle
Seat height
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Backrest angle
i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the frontpassenger seat is in an unfavorable position, it is moved to a better position.
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 119).
i Vehicles with the through-loading fea-
ture: if you fold down a rear seat backrest,
the respective front seat is moved forwards
slightly if necessary. This prevents the
seats from colliding.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust
the height and angle of the head restraints to
the correct position.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible
to your head.
Observe the important safety notes regarding
the seats (Y page 107).
Seats
X
Slide switch for head restraint height
adjustment : up or down in the direction
of the arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
X
Rear seat head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only
drive the vehicle with the head restraints
installed and engaged. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
X
Pull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the head restraint height
electrically
109
110
Seats
! Make sure that the rear window roller
sunblind has been retracted before the rear
head restraints are removed. You could
otherwise damage the roller sunblind.
= To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat
The head restraints can only be removed if the
rear seat folds forward.
X To remove: press release catch : and pull
the head restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
The active multicontour seat is only available
for the driver's side.
You can adjust the active multicontour seat
using COMAND or Audio 20. You can find further information in the separate COMAND or
Audio 20 operating instructions.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
Adjusting the multicontour seat
The multicontour seat function is only available for vehicles in Canada.
:
;
=
?
To raise the backrest contour
To soften the backrest contour
To lower the backrest contour
To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
: To adjust the thigh cushion
; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-
bar region
Seats
111
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
X
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Z
112
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prematurely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 98). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically
switches to the highest level.
Steering wheel
113
Problems with the seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
: To adjust the steering wheel height
; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature
(Y page 115)
RStoring settings (Y page 119)
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conswitched off premasumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on.
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
114
Steering wheel heating
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Switching on/off
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
Rthe
temperature in the vehicle interior is
above 86 ‡ (30 †)
Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95 ‡ (35 †).
Indicator lamp = remains on.
Steering wheel
115
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
Vehicles with a memory function: if there is a
risk of becoming trapped by the steering
wheel, you can also one of the memory function position buttons. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 240).
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's
door; the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1
must be in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when:
Rthe
driver's door is closed
KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/
Stop button once
or
Rwith the SmartKey: you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
Rwith
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The steering wheel
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conheating has switched
sumers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
not be switched on.
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel
heating will switch back on automatically.
116
Mirrors
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously
set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 119).
when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue
the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 240).
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic conditions.
X
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the
rear window defroster is switched on and the
outside temperature is low. Heating takes a
maximum of ten minutes.
i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
117
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
This function is only available in Canada.
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
X
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
button until you hear a click and then the
mirrors engage in position (Y page 117).
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 116).
X
Setting the exterior mirrors
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board
computer (Y page 241).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Briefly press button :.
G WARNING
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in Canada.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 241):
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
RRinse
off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
manually, they do not fold out.
118
Mirrors
electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
RIf
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
Rthe
ignition is switched on and
light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.
Rincident
Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
; Button for the front-passenger side exte-
rior mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this position.
X Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 149).
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
curb should be visible.
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
these steps.
X
Memory function
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
X
Ras
soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side
Memory function
Storing settings
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition lock.
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition
of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Ractive multicontour seat: seat contour,
dynamic function level
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
Adjust the seat (Y page 108).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 113) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 116).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.
X
X
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Calling up a stored parking position setting
119
Memory function
120
Calling up a stored setting
Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
121
Useful information ............................ 122
Exterior lighting ................................ 122
Interior lighting ................................. 127
Replacing bulbs ................................. 128
Lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers ............................ 128
122
Exterior lighting
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
Light switch
Operation
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
Lights and windshield wipers
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. Therefore, your
vehicle is equipped with special daytime running lamps. In some countries, operation of
the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
Rthe
light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 124)
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 238)
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position 0
Automatic headlamp mode
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
Exterior lighting
RSmartKey
in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function
via the on-board computer, the daytime
running lamps or the parking lamps and the
low-beam headlamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law
in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
the daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 238).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light
(exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
123
Exterior lighting
124
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
X
Combination switch
Lights and windshield wipers
Turn signal
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it
automatically controls activation of the highbeam headlamps (Y page 125).
High-beam flasher
To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
X
:
;
=
?
High-beam headlamps
Turn signal, right
High-beam flasher
Turn signal, left
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
X
Hazard warning lamps
High-beam headlamps
To switch on manually: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or start
the engine.
X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam
Assist: turn the light switch to L or
Ã.
X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
turn the light switch to L.
X
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
X
Exterior lighting
Ran
air bag is deployed or
vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
Rthe
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
The cornering light function is activated on
both sides before entering a traffic circle
through an evaluation of the current GPS
position of the vehicle. It remains active until
after the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In
this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for
example, are illuminated by your vehicle in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
Lights and windshield wipers
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the low-beam headlamps
are switched on.
Active:
Rif
you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
125
You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high
beam automatically. The system recognizes
vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in
front of your vehicle, and consequently
switches the headlamps from high beam to
low beam.
The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Z
126
Exterior lighting
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic highbeam headlamps will not be deactivated or
activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
Rwho
Lights and windshield wipers
Rwho
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Rdirt
:
;
=
?
X
X
High-beam headlamps
Turn signal, right
High-beam flasher
Turn signal, left
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the
light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road
users have been detected or the roads are
adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
Interior lighting
127
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of
the headlamp.
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
: p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer
(Y page 239).
Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
;
=
?
A
on/off
| To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off
c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To activate/deactivate: press the |
button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the
overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
Runlock
the vehicle
a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
Ropen
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Windshield wipers
128
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 240).
Manual interior lighting control
To switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
X
Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle
safety. You must therefore make sure that
these function correctly at all times. Have the
headlamp setting checked regularly.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe
î To wipe with washer fluid
Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
X
Windshield wipers
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
X
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
Firmly press release knob : and pull the
wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer
on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
the opposite direction from the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive
than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.
129
130
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
131
Useful information ............................ 132
Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 132
Operating the climate control systems ................................................... 138
Climate control
Setting the air vents ......................... 145
132
Overview of climate control systems
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
Climate control
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch
Rswitch
briefly
off climate control only briefly
on air-recirculation mode only
Rswitch
on the cooling with air dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 144).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 98). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most par-
ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
interior. For this reason, you should always
observe the interval for replacing the filter,
which is specified in the Maintenance
Booklet. As it depends on environmental
conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
Overview of climate control systems
133
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
134
Overview of climate control systems
USA only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 143)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)
Optimum use of dual-zone climate
control
Climate control system
The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes
out.
RIf you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds
at the bottom of the screen in the Audio or
COMAND display (see separate operating
Overview of climate control systems
135
instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
ECO start/stop function
Climate control
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 154).
136
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 144)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)
Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 140)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)
K
L
M
N
O
Rear control panel
Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
Display
Reduces the temperature (Y page 141)
Increases the temperature (Y page 141)
USA only
:
;
=
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Front control panel
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 143)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)
Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 140)
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)
K
L
M
N
O
Rear control panel
Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)
Display
Reduces the temperature (Y page 141)
Increases the temperature (Y page 141)
137
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems
138
Operating the climate control systems
Optimum use of 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most
out of your 3-zone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to set the climate mode
(FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). The
MEDIUM level is recommended.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above
the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.
RIf you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds
at the bottom of the screen in the Audio or
COMAND display (see separate operating
instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 154).
Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating the air conditioning
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly
i Activate climate control primarily using
the à button (Y page 140).
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To switch on: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
X
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
Operating the climate control systems
139
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
X
Climate control
Activating/deactivating
Operating the climate control systems
140
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button
malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot
be switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic
Climate control
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
Activating and changing the mode
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can set
the climate mode (Y page 140).
X
X
To switch to manual mode: press the
_ button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
The "Set climate mode" function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control.
You can select the following climate mode
settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS
high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press the à button.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the display.
X
Operating the climate control systems
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To increase or reduce: turn temperature
control : or B counter-clockwise or
clockwise (Y page 133).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X
141
The temperature setting for the driver's
side is adopted for the rear compartment
and the front-passenger side.
X Turn temperature control : counterclockwise or clockwise (Y page 136).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or reduce the temperature
in the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: press the r or s
button on the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
3-zone automatic climate control zones
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment.
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To increase or reduce the temperature
in the front compartment: turn temperature control : or B counter-clockwise or
clockwise (Y page 136).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X To increase or reduce the temperature
in the rear compartment using the front
control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
X
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents
(Canada only)
a Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents, the center and side air
vents as well as the footwell air vents
(Canada only)
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed when the controls on the side air
vents are turned downwards.
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control
Operating the climate control systems
142
Setting the air distribution
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
X
Setting the airflow
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To increase: press the K button.
X To reduce: press the I button.
Climate control
X
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate
control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. As soon as
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
output will be available.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment.
X To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment.
X
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh
airflow
temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
Rhigh
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. Once the battery is sufficiently charged again, full blower
output will be available again.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X Press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
temperature control : or B counterclockwise or clockwise (Y page 133).
3-zone automatic climate control: turn temperature control : or B counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 136).
or
X Press the K or I button.
Operating the climate control systems
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum
cooling
airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Rmaximum
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
air is directed to the side windows.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function ¬.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
X
Windows fogged up on the outside
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the display.
X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
X
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
X
Climate control
MAX COOL maximum cooling
143
Operating the climate control systems
144
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
ted prematurely or canlamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:
Rafter
approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately
41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately
41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
Climate control
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows
from fogging up.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i Dual-zone automatic climate control: airrecirculation mode is automatically activated at high outside temperatures.
3-zone automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at
high levels of pollution or at high outside
temperatures.
When air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically, the indicator lamp above the
g button does not light up. Outside air is
added after about 30 minutes.
X
X
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available
with 3-zone automatic climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock or remove it (Y page 149).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
i If the residual heat function is activated,
the windows may fog up on the inside.
X
Setting the air vents
i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.
145
Setting the center air vents
i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
Rafter
approximately 30 minutes
the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rwhen
Setting the air vents
:
;
=
?
X
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
Center air vent, left
Center air vent, right
Center vent thumbwheel, right
Center vent thumbwheel, left
To open or close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? up or down.
Setting the side air vents
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep
the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
: Defroster vent
; Side air vent
= Thumbwheel for side air vent
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up
or down.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperZ
Climate control
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Setting the air vents
146
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
box could be damaged.
Climate control
: Air vent control
; Air vent
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
X To open or close: turn control : to the
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel, only with 3-zone auto-
matic climate control
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X
To open or close: turn control : up or
down.
147
Useful information ............................ 148
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 148
Automatic transmission ................... 157
Refueling ............................................ 167
Parking ............................................... 170
Driving tips ........................................ 173
Driving systems ................................ 178
Driving and parking
Driving ............................................... 149
148
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Useful information
Driving and parking
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically
while a certain distance is being driven after
the vehicle has been delivered or after
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not
reached until the end of this teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
RYou
should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the tachometer.
RDo
not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles:
RDo
not drive faster than 85 mph
(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
the vehicle to full speed.
i You should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
i Always observe the respective maximum
permissible speed.
AMG vehicles with self-locking rear
axle differential
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
differential on the rear axle.
Change the oil to improve protection of the
rear axle differential:
Rafter
a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
(3,000 km)
Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or
3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life of
the differential. Have the oil change carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
with thick soles
with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-
cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid
high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-
atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum
engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid
driving at full throttle when the engine is
cold.
Rshoes
Rshoes
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat
and cause a fire
its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Rlose
g To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3 To start the engine
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-
tion lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Z
Driving and parking
Driving
149
150
Driving
Driving and parking
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You
can then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe
Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 85).
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith
electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESSGO.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where
an indicator lamp either fails to go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 275).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the key being
removed from the ignition.
Driving
Rthe
driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position
To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
The ignition is switched off when:
X
Rthe
driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey.
It is only possible to switch between Start/
Stop button mode and SmartKey operation
when the transmission is in position P.
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you leave
the vehicle. You should, however, always take
the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
X
Rthe
vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Rshifting
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator when
starting the engine.
Z
Driving and parking
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
X
151
Driving
152
General notes
Driving and parking
i The catalytic converter is preheated for
up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The
sound of the engine may change during this
time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P.
i You can start the engine in transmission
position P and N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
i To start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
Stop button out of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the
engine is running (Y page 149).
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
start the vehicle manually without inserting
the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The
Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
the vehicle. This mode for starting the
engine operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine start function.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 150).
The engine starts.
X
Pulling away
General notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
! If a warning tone sounds and the
Release Park. Brake message appears
in the multifunction display, the parking
brake is still applied. Release the parking
brake.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 240).
It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if you
depress the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is
not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can
still be moved but the parking lock remains
engaged.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
Driving
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
153
General notes
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Rthe
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
: ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you start the engine using the key
or the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the
¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction
display.
AMG vehicles: in addition, the Stop/Start
active message is shown in the AMG menu
in the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
is only available in drive program C.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
Rthe
indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
154
Driving
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
i The HOLD function can also be activated
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
Driving and parking
when the engine is stopped automatically.
if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the
accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
i All vehicles (apart from AMG vehicles):
automatic engine switch-off can take place
a maximum of four times consecutively (initial stop then repeated three times).
i AMG vehicles: times which the engine
can be automatically switched off.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou
switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is
not active
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
Ryou engage reverse gear R
Ryou move the transmission out of position
P
Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(AMG vehicles)
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,
the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.
AMG vehicles
X
To deactivate: in drive program C, press
ECO button :.
or
Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(Y page 163).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
Driving
155
If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the
automatic transmission switches to drive
program C.
Driving and parking
If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,
the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction.
Z
156
Driving
Problems with the engine
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 151). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
X
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant temperature gauge shows a
value above 248 ‡
(120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 315). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
Selector lever (AMG vehicles)
Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
j
k
i
h
Park position with parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral
Drive
Transmission position and drive program display
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and automatic drive program C or S.
Z
157
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
158
DIRECT SELECT lever
Driving and parking
Overview of transmission positions
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
The current position of the selector lever is
shown by the indicators next to the selector
lever.
The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
go out when the SmartKey is removed from
the ignition lock.
Engaging park position P
j
k
i
h
Park position with parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral
Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to
its original position. The current transmission
position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 158).
Transmission position and drive program display
! If the transmission position display in the
X
When the vehicle is stationary, press button :.
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or
S.
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission
positions you can change using the DIRECT
SELECT lever.
Automatic transmission
159
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is moving, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.
switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed
and the transmission is in position D or R
Under certain conditions, the automatic
transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the
information on the HOLD function
(Y page 192) and on DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 185).
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
If the transmission is in position D or N:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up past the first point of
resistance.
X
j
k
i
h
X
Park position with parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral
Drive
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
the multifunction display.
Depressing the brake and pushing the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages
the parking lock. The transmission is in N
neutral.
In order to shift from park position P directly
into R or D:
Rdepress
the brake pedal and
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page 153).
Shifting to neutral N
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen
the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Z
Driving and parking
Ryou
Automatic transmission
160
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Driving and parking
Rshifting
If the transmission is in position D or R:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the first point of
resistance.
X
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the
driver's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic
transmission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
Using the SmartKey:
Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X
X
X
Release the parking brake.
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Engaging drive position D
If the transmission is in position R or N:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the first point of
resistance.
X
Automatic transmission
161
Park position
Only shift the transmission into
position P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 172). The parking
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. Always apply the
parking brake in addition to the
parking lock in order to secure the
vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may
be locked in position P. Have the
vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Park position P is automatically
engaged if:
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
shift the transmission only to position N if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
Driving and parking
Ryou
! Rolling in neutral N can damage
Transmission positions
B
switch off the engine using
the SmartKey and remove the
SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using
the SmartKey or using the Start/
Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
Rthe driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the
transmission is in position D or R
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position R when the vehicle is stationary.
A
the drive train.
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
7
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe
selected drive program (Y page 162)
position of the accelerator pedal
(Y page 161)
Rthe road speed
Rthe
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle
throttle: early upshifts
throttle: late upshifts
Rmore
Z
Automatic transmission
162
Driving and parking
AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function
reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends
on the drive program selected.
Program selector button
General notes
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
X
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicles with
the Sports package AMG)
X
Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive
program appears in the multifunction display.
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
forth between transmission positions D and R
can help to free a vehicle that has become
stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine
management restricts switching between
transmission positions D and R to speeds up
to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift
back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever
up and down past the point of resistance.
Vehicles with the AMG Sports package
X
Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive
program appears in the multifunction display.
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving characteristics.
i Further information about permanent
drive program M (Y page 165).
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 164).
E Economy
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport
Sporty driving style
M Manual
Manual gear shifting
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 164).
i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
AMG vehicles
M Manual
Manual gear shifting
RS RACE
START
Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 164).
i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program C each time the
engine is started.
i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE
START, see (Y page 192).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Drive program selector with manual drive program
X
Turn drive program selector : until the
desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer.
The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red.
i Further information about permanent
drive program M (Y page 165).
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 164).
C Controlled
Efficiency
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport
Sporty driving style
S+ SportPlus
Extremely sporty driving
style
In the manual drive program, you can change
gears manually using steering wheel paddle
shifters : and ;.
Further information about permanent drive
program M (Y page 165).
Further information about temporary drive
program M (Y page 164).
i You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D.
Z
163
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
164
Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program
i As well as temporary drive program M,
you can also activate permanent drive program M (Y page 162).
Further information about permanent drive
program M (Y page 165).
Driving and parking
Automatic drive program E
Drive program E (drive program C on MAG
vehicles) is characterized by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented
engine and automatic
transmission settings.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
Automatic drive program S
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterized by the following:
Rsporty
engine and automatic transmission
settings.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later.
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E and S automatic drive programs.
Activating
Shift the transmission to position D.
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 163).
Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The selected gear and M appear in
the multifunction display.
X
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
switches to manual drive program M for a
limited amount of time. Depending on which
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear
down or up, if permitted.
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts up in
order to prevent engine damage.
To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
X
i Automatic down shifting occurs when
coasting.
Automatic transmission
Shift recommendation
165
Manual drive program (AMG vehicles
and vehicles with Sports package
AMG)
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according
to gearshift recommendation : when
shown in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Deactivating
If you have activated manual drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount of
time. Under certain conditions the minimum
amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of
lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase
or when driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself:
X
Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 163).
or
X
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position (Y page 158).
or
X
Use the program selector button to change
the drive program (Y page 162).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D.
i As well as this permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
program M (Y page 164).
Switching on the manual drive program
Press the program selector button
(Y page 162) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display.
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 163) until M appears in the
multifunction display.
The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red.
X
Manual drive program M is different from
drive programs S and S+ with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of
gear changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected
using the drive program selector. In manual
drive program M, you can change gear using
the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. The gear currently
selected and engaged is shown in the multifunction display.
Upshifting
X
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
AMG vehicles
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automati-
Z
Driving and parking
General information
Driving and parking
166
Automatic transmission
cally even when the engine limiting speed
for the current gear is reached. When the
engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel
supply is cut to prevent the engine from
overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
engine damage.
Downshifting
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
shifting down, the automatic transmission
will shift down to a gear that will allow the
vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
transmission selects the optimum gear for
the current speed.
: Gear indicator
; Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.
X When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
Shift recommendation
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
X
i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use
kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off the manual drive program
Press the program selector button
(Y page 162).
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 163).
X
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X If corresponding gearshift recommendation : appears in the multifunction display
on the instrument cluster, pull on the righthand steering wheel paddle shifter
(Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts to recommended gear ;.
Refueling
167
Problems with the transmission
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
is deteriorating.
It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no
X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Z
Driving and parking
Problem
168
Refueling
Driving and parking
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Opening the fuel filler flap
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 387).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 167).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle.
Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupe)
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
= Tire pressure table
? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-
eled
Switch off the engine.
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on
the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
X
X
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Refueling
169
Closing the fuel filler flap
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Driving and parking
X
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from
closing.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A
message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 261).
Fuel filler flap emergency release
open the trunk lid.
Slide down the parcel net.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X Detach the emergency release from
retainer :.
X Pull the emergency release in the direction
of arrow ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
X
X
Z
170
Parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Driving and parking
Problem
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G WARNING
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as
the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 84).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 86).
X Open the trunk lid.
X
X
X
Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 169).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Parking
G WARNING
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
X
X
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift
the transmission to position P.
Driving and parking
Rrelease
Rshift
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
X
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
X
Rthe
parking brake must be applied.
transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Rthe
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
171
AMG vehicles: when the vehicle is stationary, press button :.
With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESSGO Start/Stop button (Y page 150).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key
position 0: "Key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the
driver's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic
transmission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
Z
Parking
172
Using the SmartKey:
Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Driving and parking
X
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for about three seconds.
This function operates independently of the
ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off
function.
Parking brake
G WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease
the parking brake.
the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rshift
If you brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Pull release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
Driving tips
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
X
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Emission control
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
Z
Driving and parking
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
173
Driving and parking
174
Driving tips
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, only have work on the engine carried
out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
Rload
RAcceleration
pressure
start
Rchoice of route
Relectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
RConstant
i An economical driving style specially
ECO display
The ECO display provides feedback on how
economical your driving characteristics are.
The ECO display assists you in achieving the
most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your
driving style can significantly influence the
vehicle's consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
RCoasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving
style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count
in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed
consumption.
Rtire
Rcold
requires driving at moderate engine
speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Acceleration and Constant
Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive in drive program E.
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change.
i The ECO display summarizes the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
Driving tips
For further information on the ECO display,
see (Y page 230).
Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
advantage of the engine braking effect and
helps avoid overheating and excessive
wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive
train. This type of damage is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
brakes to rub by constantly applying light
pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up
the brake discs, thereby drying them more
quickly and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salttreated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance.
Z
Driving and parking
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
175
176
Driving tips
Driving and parking
RIn
order to prevent any salt build-up, apply
the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the
brake fluid level may be too low. Observe
additional warning messages in the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
formance tests may only be carried out on
a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning
to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center to obtain further information
first. Otherwise, you could damage the
drive train or the brake system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-
tem operates automatically, the engine and
the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or
Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) while
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
dynamometer.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-
tem operates automatically, the engine and
the ignition system must be switched off
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)
when:
Rtesting
the parking brake on a brake
dynamometer.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
one of the axles raised.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do
so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of
the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 71) or of BAS PLUS on
(Y page 71).
The braking characteristics of the vehicle can
be seriously impaired if:
Rbrake pads other than those recommended
are installed
Rthe recommended brake fluid is not used
Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed.
AMG high-performance and ceramic
brakes
The high-performance brake system is only
available on AMG vehicles.
The AMG brake systems are designed for
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rspeed
Rlower
Rbraking
force
Renvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a
mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead
to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt
your driving and braking accordingly during
this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the
brake wear warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and note any brake status messages
in the multifunction display. Especially for
high performance driving, it is important to
maintain and have the brake system checked
regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou
Rthe
drive at low speeds.
tires have adequate tread depth.
your speed.
ruts.
Ravoid sudden steering movements.
Rbrake carefully.
Ravoid
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the
engine's air suction nozzles and this can
cause engine damage.
Winter driving
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Z
177
Driving and parking
Driving tips
Driving systems
Driving and parking
178
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
driving style. Always adapt your driving style
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 347).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 346).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 346).
Driving systems
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for
innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the
driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz
has set a milestone on the path towards
autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one
well thought out system – for the safety of the
vehicle occupants and that of other road
users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 70).
Cruise Control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
in time. By doing so, you will make use of the
braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
Driving systems
Rin
road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
;
=
?
To activate or increase speed
To activate or reduce speed
To deactivate cruise control
To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe
parking brake must be released.
are driving faster than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Ryou
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can accept the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Z
Driving and parking
Do not use cruise control:
179
Driving systems
Driving and parking
180
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
X
Deactivating cruise control
Setting a speed
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.
or
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou
depress the parking brake
are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
Ryou
i When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Driving systems
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
automatically so that the set speed is not
exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
i USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rpeople
or animals
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Roncoming
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Z
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS
181
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
a risk of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
Rin
towing the vehicle
the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
speed.
This speed may:
Rthere
Rbe
too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive
countries)
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the right (right-hand
drive countries)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
Rin
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
? To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed
A To set the specified minimum distance
Driving systems
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe
engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe hood must be closed.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving
vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is
18 mph (30 km/h).
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; up : or down = .
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down = until the desired speed is
set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
X
Z
Driving and parking
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
183
Driving systems
184
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
Driving and parking
X
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
In this way, the distance you have selected is
maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
the speed you have stored.
Selecting the drive program
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving
style when you have selected the S or M (AMG
vehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program
(Y page 162). Acceleration behind the vehicle
in front or to the set speed is then noticeably
more dynamic. If you have selected the E
(AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou
If you want to pull away with
DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from
the brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.
X
i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
on a different line from another vehicle. The
vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all
times.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front
Ryou have switched on the corresponding
turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
drive vehicles.
Driving systems
Stopping
185
Setting a speed
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
For further information on deactivating
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:
Rthe
driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 186).
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
with the minimum distance as required by
Z
Driving and parking
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 186).
X To increase: turn control ; in direction
=.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
General notes
In the Assistance menu (Y page 235) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assistance display.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer
? Own vehicle
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 235).
Driving systems
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
187
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
= Own vehicle
? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 235).
i You will see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC
PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou
engage the parking brake
intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
RESP®
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering,
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :.
going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
ROther vehicles changing lanes
RNarrow vehicles
RObstructions and stationary vehicles
RCrossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary.
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in
Z
Driving and parking
you switch off the engine.
188
Driving systems
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Driving and parking
Narrow vehicles
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle
in the center of the driving lane by means of
moderate steering interventions in the speed
range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
means of multifunction camera :, at the top
of the windshield.
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,
taking into account lane markings, e.g. when
following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)
Steering Assist focuses on detected lane
markings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in front if lane markings are missing.
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide
assistance.
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for
the function to be available.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
It cannot take account of road, weather and
traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time and for staying in your
lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle
which is driving towards the edge of the road,
your vehicle could come into contact with the
curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly
aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that
are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the
lane or projecting out into the lane are not
detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
can be corrected at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it
does not leave the lane.
Z
189
Driving and parking
Driving systems
190
Driving systems
The support provided by the system can be
impaired if:
Driving and parking
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
area
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if:
actively change lanes
switch on the turn signal
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
not steer for a prolonged period of time
requires the driver to keep his hands on the
steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you
with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you
have still not started to steer and have not
taken hold of the steering wheel after five
seconds at the latest, a warning tone also
sounds to remind you to take control of the
vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS
remains active.
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using
the on-board computer (Y page 236).
The DTR+: Steering Assistant On message appears in the multifunction display.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
active.
Information in the multifunction display
Ryou
Ryou
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not
provide assistance:
Ron
very sharp corners
a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed.
Pay attention also to the important safety
notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 181).
The steering interventions are carried out
with a limited steering moment. The system
Rwhen
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in
gray. If the system provides you with support
by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 236).
The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off
message appears in the multifunction dis-
Driving systems
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
are deactivated automatically.
Rwhen
Rin
HOLD function
towing the vehicle
the car wash
Activation conditions
General notes
You can activate the HOLD function if:
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rthe
Rwhen
pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
vehicle is stationary
engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened
Rthe parking brake is released
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Rthe
Activating the HOLD function
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until ë : appears in the multifunction
display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
X
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
Z
Driving and parking
play. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
deactivated.
191
192
Driving systems
Deactivating the HOLD function
Driving and parking
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:
Ryou
accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
When the HOLD function is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:
Rthe
driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
engine oil temperature in the multifunction
display stops flashing.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
(Y page 77)
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
pedal is depressed (left foot).
Rthe transmission is in position D.
Activating RACE START
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
(Y page 163) until the RS lamp lights up.
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears
in the multifunction display.
i If the activation conditions are no longer
fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The
RACE START Canceled message appears
in the multifunction display.
X
X
RACE START
Important safety notes
i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT
handling mode (Y page 77).
RACE START is intended solely for activation
on dedicated race circuits.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. The precondition for
this is a suitable high-grip road surface.
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles.
Conditions for activation
You can activate RACE START if:
Rthe
doors are closed.
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
operating temperature of approximately
176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the
To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163).
or
To confirm: pull the right steering wheel
paddle shifter (Y page 163).
The RACE START Available Depress
gas pedal message appears in the multifunction display.
i If you do not depress the accelerator
pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
START is canceled. The RACE START Not
Possible See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed rises to approximately
3,500 rpm.
The RACE START Release brake to
start message appears in the multifunction display.
i If you do not release the brake pedal
within five seconds, RACE START is canX
Driving systems
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
The RACE START Active message appears
in the multifunction display.
ing and
lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
the vehicle.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph
(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if
you release the accelerator pedal during
RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START
Not Possible See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction display.
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available
again after the vehicle has been driven a
certain distance.
AIRMATIC
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
Ryou have selected comfort suspension tunRyou
! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if:
Ryou
have selected "Comfort tuning"
switch off the engine and then
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Ryou
If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds of
having switched the engine off, the vehicle is
lowered slightly when Comfort suspension
mode is selected.
Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground
clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When
you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.
The following vehicle levels are possible:
RNormal
RRaised:
the vehicle is raised by approximately 0.80 in (20 mm) when compared
with the normal level
RLowered: the vehicle is raised by approximately 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared
with the normal level
i These changes in level are so slight that
you are hardly aware of them.
The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can
be set manually.
Z
Driving and parking
X
celed. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
193
Driving systems
194
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically:
Driving and parking
Rat
speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)
Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"
(Y page 194)
Setting the vehicle level
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Setting raised level
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press button : .
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
Ryour
driving style, e.g. sporty
road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Rthe
Sports tuning
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle
height is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in
the display.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph
(120 km/h)
for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).
The "Raised level" remains active when you
are not driving within these speed ranges.
Rdrive
Setting the normal level
X Start the engine.
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures even better contact with the road.
Select this mode when employing a sporty
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected.
The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in
the multifunction display.
Comfort tuning
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more
Driving systems
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
When parking, position your vehicle so that
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
Ryour
driving style, e.g. sporty
road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport +
or Comfort
Rthe
Sport mode
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-
ing and
lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
the vehicle.
Ryou
! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in
(20 mm) if:
Ryou
have selected "Comfortable tuning"
switch off the engine and then
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
Ryou
: Mode selection button
; Button to store, recall and display the
selected mode
= Sport + mode indicator lamp
? Sport mode indicator lamp
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures better contact with the road. Select
this mode when employing a sporty driving
style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Z
Driving and parking
comfortable driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning
is selected.
The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears
in the multifunction display.
195
Driving systems
Driving and parking
196
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
contact with the road. Select this mode preferably when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
X
Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT +
message appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ? lights up:
X
Press button : once.
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT +
message appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
When comfort mode is selected, the driving
characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a comfort-oriented driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ? go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT
message appears in the multifunction display.
Storing and calling up settings
Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and
call up your settings using AMG button ;.
X To store: press and hold AMG button ;
until you hear a tone.
X
To call up: press AMG button ;.
The stored suspension tuning and drive
program are selected.
X
To display: briefly press AMG button ;.
Your selection appears in the multifunction
display.
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
The vehicle may be lowered if you press the
suspension setting selector button or the
AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is
stationary.
! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance decreases. Make sure that no objects
become trapped or that the vehicle does
not become damaged, for example, on the
curb.
i The vehicle level may change visibly at the
rear axle if you park the vehicle and the
outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level lowers;
with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
Changing the rear axle ride height
This function is only available for the CLS 63
AMG 4MATIC.
The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on
the selected suspension tuning and the vehicle speed.
The vehicle level at the rear axle changes during the journey depending on the selected
suspension tuning:
RComfort:
RSport
+0.4 in (+10 mm)
+ and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
Driving systems
Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate differences in
the vehicle level by raising or lowering the
rear axle. This is the case, for example, if people get out or if luggage is being loaded.
Load compensation takes place if:
Ra
door, the trunk lid or the tailgate is
opened
Rthe parked vehicle is unlocked
For larger level changes, the engine must be
running.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
less when driving.
RAccelerate
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground or
be fully raised. Observe the instructions for
towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it
improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
grip.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate
surroundings. You are always responsible for
safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
there are no persons, animals or objects in
the area in which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Z
Driving and parking
When changing from Comfort to Sport or
Sport +, the axle is lowered approximately
1.0 in (25 mm). When changing from Sport or
Sport + to Comfort, the axle is raised approximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level change also
takes place when the vehicle is stationary.
If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h),
the rear axle level is set to a middle level. This
increases driving safety and reduces air
resistance. If you then drive slower than
93 mph (150 km/h), the level of the rear axle
is again adjusted to correspond to the selected suspension mode.
197
198
Driving systems
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Range
Driving and parking
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch
on the ignition
the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Rshift
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects.
the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading
ramps.
Rabove
Front sensors
Center
Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners
Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners
Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 321).
Minimum distance
Center
Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners
Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
Driving systems
Warning displays
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth
segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Warning display for the front area
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission
position
Warning display
D
Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle
is rolling backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
P
No areas activated
: Indicator lamp
; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Z
Driving and parking
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
199
200
Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC
X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
warning displays are lit.
specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC
X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 321).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention and brake application
can assist you during parking. You may also
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 197).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that
no persons, animals or objects are in the
maneuvering range.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
G WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for
parking, for example:
Rwhere
parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron
unsuitable surfaces
Driving systems
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-
ing space as possible.
spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured
incorrectly.
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 199) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
RParking
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Rthat
G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
RActive
Park Assist may steer too early
vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Rthe
For further information on the detection
range (Y page 198).
Active Parking Assist does not assist you
parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if:
Rtwo
parking spaces are located directly
next to one another
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
Ryou park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not assist you
parking in spaces that are parallel or at right
angles to the direction of travel if:
Rthe
parking space is on a curb
system reads the parking space as
being blocked, for example by foliage or
grass paving blocks
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
maneuver into
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Rthe
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles.
Example: detected parking space
: Detected parking space on the left
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is
Z
Driving and parking
Parking tips:
201
Driving and parking
202
Driving systems
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your
vehicle
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider
than your vehicle
i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot
measure the length of a parking space if it
is at right angles to the direction of travel.
You will need to judge whether your vehicle
will fit into the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as
a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist
only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
signal on the driver's side is activated. When
parking on the driver's side, this must remain
switched on until you acknowledge the use of
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The system automatically determines
whether the parking space is parallel or at
right angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
away if:
Rthere
is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time.
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
X
X
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Driving systems
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
a standstill when the vehicle is in the parking space.
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
Further transmission shifts may be necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Disabled message
appears in the multifunction display and you
will hear a tone. The vehicle is now parked.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal. The
braking effect is canceled when you depress
the accelerator pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.
X
X
Maneuver if necessary.
Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 199).
Parking tips:
RThe
way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in
front and behind it and the conditions of the
location. It may be the case that Active
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or
onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
RYou can also select preselect transmission
position D. The vehicle redirects and does
not drive as far into the parking space.
Should a gear be changed too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when exiting the parking space:
Rthe
border of the parking space must be
high enough at the front and the rear. A
curb is too small, for example.
Rthe border of the parking space must not be
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
position as it is maneuvering into the parking space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst
the vehicle exits the parking space. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
Z
Driving and parking
Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
a standstill when the vehicle approaches
the rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.
203
Driving systems
Driving and parking
204
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
X Start the engine.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
you are pulling away.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
required or according to the message while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
X
Drive forwards and back up as instructed
by the PARKTRONIC warning displays.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
the Park Assist Finished message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You
can take over the steering, before the vehicle
has exited the parking space completely. This
is useful, for example when you recognize
that it is already possible to pull out of the
parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display
and you hear a tone.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console (Y page 199).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display and
you hear a tone.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if:
Rthe
transmission is shifted too early
position P is selected
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display
shows the Park Assist Canceled message.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
Rtransmission
Driving systems
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Rat
205
night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
Rear view camera
General notes
Example: CLS Coupe
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guidelines in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 321)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines, depending on
technical conditions.
i The rear view camera is protected from
raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
When the rear view camera is activated,
this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
i The text shown in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND
display.
Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-
ess
Ryou
switch off the engine
open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 321).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Ryou
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the area
in which you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Rif
Rin
the trunk lid or tailgate is open
heavy rain, snow or fog
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R
gear function is selected in Audio 20 or
X
Z
Driving and parking
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
Driving and parking
206
Driving systems
COMAND, see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The area
behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines
in the Audio 20 or COMAND display.
The image from the rear view camera is
available throughout the maneuvering
process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Messages in the Audio 20/COMAND
display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery
close to the rear bumper
the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
Runder
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe
bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving systems
207
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 205).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
X
: Front warning display
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
= Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 199),
additional measurement operational readiness indicator appears in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display ;. If the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light
up correspondingly in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
: Parking space marking
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 205).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parkX
: White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Z
Driving and parking
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Driving systems
208
Driving and parking
ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches
parking space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
: Red guide line at a distance of approx-
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
; Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steering wheel
= End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
Wide-angle function
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Own vehicle
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
You can also use the rear view camera to
select a wide-angle view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational
(Y page 199), a symbol for your own vehicle
appears in the Audio 20 or COMAND display.
If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are
active, warning displays = light up in the
Driving systems
Audio 20 or COMAND display in yellow or red
respectively.
209
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will
also be optically displayed:
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras.
The system analyzes images from the following cameras:
RRear
view camera
camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is
restricted at an exit.
You can show pictures from the 360° camera
in full-screen mode or in six different splitscreen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 display. A split-screen view also includes a top
view of the vehicle. This view is calculated
from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle)
Rtop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Rtop view and enlarged front view
Rtop view and images from the side mirror
cameras (rear wheel view)
Rtop view and images from the side mirror
cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic
guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
selected front or rear view.
RFront
split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view,
or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen
mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
Ryellow brackets with thin lines:
PARKTRONIC is active
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an
object is present in close range of the vehicle
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show
a distorted view of obstacles, show them
incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or
parking, make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
endanger yourself and others.
The 360° camera will not function or will
function in a limited manner:
Rif
the doors are open
the exterior mirrors are folded in
Rif the trunk lid/tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright
light
Rif
Z
Driving and parking
Rin
Driving systems
210
Driving and parking
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
Rif the vehicle components in which the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level.
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving
the standard height can result in:
Rinaccuracies
in the guide lines
in the display of generated
images (top view)
Rinaccuracies
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Ryour
vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock
RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on
Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on
Switching on the 360° camera
X
or
Press the Ø button in the center console for longer than two seconds.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the rear view camera
Press the Ø button in the center console.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the rear view camera
X
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R
gear function is selected in COMAND/
Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND/
Audio 20 operating instructions).
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND/Audio 20 display in split-screen
mode. You see the top view of the vehicle
and the image from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screen and full
screen displays
Switching between split screen views
To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn
3 the controller.
X
X
To switch to 180° View:
View turn 3 the
controller to select 180° View and press
7 to confirm.
i The 180° View option is only available in
the following views:
Driving systems
view with picture from the rear view
camera
RTop view with picture from the front camera
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
Displays in the COMAND/Audio 20 display
Important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the
system in the following locations:
Runder
the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle/trunk lid handle
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe
bumper of a parked vehicle
drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
;
=
?
A
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and rear view camera image
Guide line for the maximum steering angle
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Rthe
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
D Bumper
E Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
Z
Driving and parking
RTop
211
212
Driving systems
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view and enlarged rear view
Driving and parking
Top view with picture from the front camera
: Symbol for the split screen setting with
: Symbol for the split screen setting with
;
=
?
A
B
top view and front camera image
Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the
vehicle
Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
top view and rear view camera image
enlarged
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side mirror
cameras
: Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing side mirror camera setting
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
i You can also select the side mirror camera setting for the rear-facing view.
Driving systems
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
; Own vehicle
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
i 180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
The 360° camera display is stopped
Rwhen you select transmission position P, or
Rwhen
you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears on the
COMAND/Audio 20 display. You can also
switch the display by selecting the & symbol in the display and pressing 7 the controller to confirm.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
the length of the journey is less than
approximately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h)
Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS
Steering Assist activated
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your
tiredness again if:
Ryou
switch off the engine
take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break
Ryou
Displaying the attention level
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to
125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on
the part of the driver, it suggests taking a
break.
Z
Driving and parking
180° view
213
Driving systems
Driving and parking
214
You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 235)
of the on-board computer.
X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer
(Y page 235).
The following information is displayed:
Rlength
of the journey since the last break.
attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in
five levels from high to low.
Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a
warning, the System Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Rthe
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 236).
The system determines the attention level
of the driver depending on the setting
selected:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with
which the system determines the attention
level is set to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display
when the engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity
selected corresponds to the last selection
activated (standard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the
multifunction display: Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only
happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects
typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is
issued in the multifunction display, a service
station search is performed in COMAND. You
can select a service station and navigation to
this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in
COMAND.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 214) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 216).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will
also receive an optical and audible collision
Driving systems
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere
are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Driving and parking
warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
rear bumper for monitoring purposes.
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles
or bicycles
road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rthe
215
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Z
216
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Indicator and warning display
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 237).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
: Indicator lamp (yellow)
Warning lamp (red)
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is
always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator or warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
mounted at the top of the windshield. Active
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the road and can warn you before you leave
your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive
Rnot
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
Driving systems
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe
lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 235) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
X
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed for
a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed for
a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
Z
Driving and parking
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
217
218
Driving systems
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Driving and parking
Ryou
approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe
Ryou
road has narrow lanes.
cut the corner on a bend.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 181), Active
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 218) and Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 221).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you
will also receive a visual and audible collision
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a
collision. Before a course-correcting brake
application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar
sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles
overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers
and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may
otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if there are vehicles at the edge of
their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
Warning display
: Warning display
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated or indicated with a delay.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
Rpoor
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is
always given when a vehicle enters the blind
spot monitoring range from behind or from
the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
warning only occurs if the difference in speed
is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
Z
219
Driving and parking
Driving systems
Driving and parking
220
Driving systems
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the
surroundings.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
double warning tone and red warning lamp :
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of
red warning lamp :. There are no further
warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
G WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the
multifunction display underlining the danger
of a side collision.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An inappropriate course-correcting brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate, for example.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the
driving situation occurs if:
Rthere
are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 237).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
X
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
account of road and weather conditions. It
may not recognize traffic situations. Active
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Rgive
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front,
rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system.
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on the road and can warn you
before you leave your lane unintentionally. If
you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the
vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
be operational
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
risk of accident nor override the laws of phys-
an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g.
obscured by snow
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Z
221
Driving and parking
Driving systems
222
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Rthe
distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and broken lane markings are detected, no
lane-correcting brake application is made.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traffic conditions or road users to a limited
extent. In very rare cases, the system may
make an inappropriate brake application, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a solid lane
marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing
the vehicle back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction display.
A lane-correcting brake application can be
made after driving over a lane marking recognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a
warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides
must be recognized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to
your vehicle.
i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
Ryou
clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
RESP® is switched off.
Driving systems
transmission is not in position D.
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving.
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed.
There is a possibility that the Active Lane
Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
Rswitch on the turn signal
Rclearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:
Ra
driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou
approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe
Ryou
road has narrow lanes.
cut the corner on a bend.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 237).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 235) are shown in green. Active
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Z
Driving and parking
Rthe
223
224
Useful information ............................ 226
Important safety notes ..................... 226
Displays and operation ..................... 226
Menus and submenus ...................... 229
Display messages ............................. 245
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 274
On-board computer and displays
225
On-board computer and displays
226
Displays and operation
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 33).
Displays and operation
Coolant temperature display
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the left-hand side
(Y page 33).
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Displays and operation
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
display indicates the temperature measured
and does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 229).
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Operating the on-board computer
On-board computer and displays
Outside temperature display
Overview
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
control activated (Y page 178):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 181):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
RCruise
: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Left control panel
X
227
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Z
On-board computer and displays
228
Displays and operation
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls
9
:
Press briefly:
%
RBack
up the menu and menu bar
in lists
a submenu or function
RVehicles with Audio 20: in the
Audio menu, selects the previous or next stored station, when
the preset list or station list is
active, or an audio track
RVehicles with COMAND: in the
Audio menu, selects the previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone
number
RVehicles
with Audio 20:
Switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating instructions)
RHides display messages or calls
up the last Trip menu function
used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
RScrolls
RSelects
9
:
a
Press and hold:
RVehicles
with Audio 20: in the
Audio menu, selects the previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
selects an audio track using
rapid scrolling, or selects a video
scene
RVehicles with COMAND: in the
Audio menu, selects a preset list
or station list in the desired frequency range or an audio track
or video scene using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
RConfirms the selection or display
message
the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn
Press briefly:
%
Press and hold:
RCalls
up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Right control panel
~
RRejects
or ends a call
the telephone book/redial
memory
RExits
6
RMakes
or accepts a call
to the redial memory
RSwitches
W
X
RAdjusts
8
RMute
?
RVehicles
the volume
with Audio 20:
Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches on the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating instructions)
Multifunction display
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a
menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 227).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip
: Text field
; Menu bar
= Drive program, vehicles with a DIRECT
SELECT selector lever (Y page 158) or
AMG vehicles (Y page 157)
? Transmission position, vehicles with a
DIRECT SELECT selector lever
(Y page 158) or AMG vehicles
(Y page 157)
A Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 238)
X
To display menu bar ;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
Text field : shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
menu (Y page 229)
menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 231)
RAudio menu (Y page 232)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 233)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 235)
RServ menu (Y page 237)
RSett menu (settings) (Y page 237)
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 242)
The Audio
Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly
in vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles with
COMAND. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
COMAND.
RNavi
Trip menu
Standard display
Z
Gearshift recommendation when
shifting manually (Y page 164)
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 200)
CRUISE Cruise Control (Y page 178)
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 126)
¤
ECO start/stop function
(Y page 153)
ë
HOLD function (Y page 191)
X
Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Z
229
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
230
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
For further information on the ECO display,
see (Y page 174).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
:
;
=
?
Distance
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start or From Reset.
Reset
X
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 231).
The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles.
Fuel consumption is not displayed in AMG
vehicles.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
current fuel consumption and approximate
range.
The approximate range that can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount of
fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a
vehicle being refueled C instead of the
range.
Digital speedometer
ECO display
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
In addition, the multifunction display may
show a gearshift recommendation Z.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
ECO DISPLAY.
DISPLAY
X
Observe the information on gearshift recommendation Z when shifting manually
(Y page 164).
AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation
appears in the status area of the multifunction display and not in the display of the
digital speedometer.
Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see the
separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
X
Route guidance not active
Resetting values
: Direction of travel
; Current road
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
X
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
You can reset the values of the following functions:
Distance to the destination
Distance to the next change of direction
Current road
"Follow the road's course" symbol
RTrip
odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
:
;
=
?
i If you reset the values in the ECO display,
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
the values in the "From start" trip computer
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
"From start" trip computer, the values in
the ECO display are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on navigation in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND
operating instructions.
: Road into which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
Z
231
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
232
Menus and submenus
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Road into which the change of direction
The navigation system displays additional
information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
RNew
Route... or Calculating Route
A new route is calculated.
RRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized,
e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private
land.
RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected destination.
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Lanes not recommended
? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be
added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if you stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of
direction without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the navigation system
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position
i The menu shows station ; with station
frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ;
if this has been stored.
Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and select
Radio; see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X
Vehicles with Audio 20:
To select a station in the preset list:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a station in the station list:
press and hold the 9 or : button.
X
Vehicles with COMAND:
Video DVD operation
To select a preset list or station list:
press and briefly hold the 9 or :
button until the preset list or station list in
the desired frequency range is shown.
X To select a station: press 9 or :
briefly.
X
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
Further information on navigation can be
found in the "Satellite radio" section in the
separate Audio 20 or COMAND operating
instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
Only for vehicles with COMAND: you can use
the Audio menu to play video DVDs.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
been reached.
Telephone menu
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and select
audio CD or MP3 mode; see the separate
operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired track :
appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
X
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see the
separate operating instructions.
Z
233
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
234
Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio
20 or COMAND, see the separate operating
instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone
READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RPhone No service:
service there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
X
Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.
You can accept a call even if you are not in the
Tel menu.
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not
in the Tel menu.
Dialing an entry from the phone book
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or
% button.
X
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button.
X
Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist. menu:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 235)
RActivating/deactivating ESP® (except AMG
vehicles) (Y page 235)
RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 236)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 236)
RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 236)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST (Y page 236)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 237)
Displaying the assistance graphic
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Assist.
Graphic.
Graphic
X
Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic.
The assistance graphic shows you the status and further information on the following
driving systems or driving safety systems:
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 79)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(Y page 73)
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 213)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 216)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 221)
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.
X
Deactivating/activating ESP®
i Observe the important safety notes on
ESP® (Y page 76).
G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 77).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 75).
X Start the engine.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
X Press 9 or : to select ESP
ESP.
Rin
Z
235
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
236
Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
X
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 277).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 246).
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
Brake
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
PRE-SAFE Brake.
Brake
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol
in the multifunction display.
X
For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 79).
Activating/deactivating COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Collision Prevent..
Prevent.
X
Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
deactivated, the assistance graphic shows
the æ symbol in the multifunction display.
X
For further information about COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 73).
Activating/deactivating Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Using 9 or :, select DTR+: Steer.
Asst.
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
are activated, the multifunction display
shows the DTR+: Steer. Asst. On message.
X
Further information about DISTRONIC PLUS
with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
(Y page 189).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Attention
Assist.
Assist
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off
Off,
Standard or Sensitive
Sensitive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,
the é symbol appears in the multifuncX
tion display in the assistance graphics display.
Service menu
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 213).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist
X Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
X
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 214).
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 218).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keep. Assist.
Assist
X Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off
Off,
Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 216).
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 221).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv. menu:
RCalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 245)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 352)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 352)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 316)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the following options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 238)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 238)
RChanging the vehicle settings
(Y page 240)
RChanging the convenience settings
(Y page 240)
RRestoring the factory settings
(Y page 241)
Z
237
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
238
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in
the multifunction display.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
miles
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:
RDigital
speedometer in the Trip menu
and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
RCurrent consumption and the range
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
RCruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
ROdometer
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display function.
You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Additional Speedome‐
X
ter [km/h]/Additional
[km/h] Additional Speedometer
[mph].
[mph]
X Press the a button to save the setting.
i The speed is highlighted in km/h or in
mph conversely to your speedometer.
Lights
Setting the brightness of the instrument
cluster lighting and switches
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted with the Brightness
Display/Switches: function.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Brightness Display/Switches: function.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Level 1 to
Level 5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
L, the brightness is dependent upon
the brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of
the multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
i This function is not available in Canada.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Day
Lights function.
If the Day Lights function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the W
symbol in the multifunction display are
shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Further information on daytime running
lamps (Y page 122).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-. function.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off to Level 5
(bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Setting the ambient lighting color
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light Col. function.
X Press a to confirm.
Press the : or 9 button to set the
color to SOLAR
SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR
POLAR.
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
X
Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switchoff
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Sur‐
round Lighting function.
If the Surround Lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around
the vehicle are displayed in orange in the
multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily:
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
X
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
reactivated the next time you start the
engine.
If you have activated the Surround Light‐
ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 122).
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close
Z
239
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
240
Menus and submenus
all the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, the
exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up:
RParking lamps
RSide marker lamps
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20 seconds after you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light. Delay function.
If the Light. Delay function has been
switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
Door Locks function.
When the Auto. Door Locks function is
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 91).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature
G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Easy Entry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed
in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display
shows the vehicle's exterior mirror in
orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 115).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment function.
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange
in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment,
see (Y page 49).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking feature on/off
This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you switch on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function, the exterior mirrors are
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors
fold out again.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior
mirrors will not fold out automatically
(Y page 117).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :.
Restoring the factory settings
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select No
or Yes
Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you select Yes
Yes, the multifunction display
shows a confirmation message.
X
For safety reasons, the Day Lights function
in the Lights submenu is only reset if the
vehicle is stationary.
Z
241
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
242
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
SETUP
AMG displays
:
;
=
?
A
B
X
Digital speedometer
Gear indicator
Upshift indicator
Engine oil temperature
Coolant temperature
Status indicator for ECO start/stop function (Y page 153)
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine oil temperature: when the engine
and transmission are at normal operating
temperature, oil temperature ? is displayed
in white in the multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
If the conditions for the ECO start/stop function are fulfilled and the vehicle is stationary,
status indicator B is shown.
: Drive program (C
C/SS+
SS+/M
M)
; ESP® mode ON
ON/OFF
OFF or SPORT handling
mode SPORT
= Suspension setting COMFORT
COMFORT/SPORT
SPORT/
SPORT +
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
suspension tuning.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.
or
X Briefly press the AMG button on the center
console (Y page 195).
X
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
: Lap
; RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X
Displaying the intermediate time
Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
X Confirm Yes with a.
X
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop
the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position
1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to
position 3 and then press a to confirm
Start, timing is continued.
Start
Press = or ; to select Interm.
Time.
Time
X Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
X
Resetting the current lap
Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
Lap
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
X
Deleting all laps
Starting a new lap
: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
Lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap.
Lap
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset
Reset.
Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Z
243
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
244
Overall statistics
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
X
:
;
=
?
A
RACETIMER overall evaluation
Total time driven
Average speed
Distance covered
Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.
X
Lap statistics
:
;
=
?
A
Lap
Lap time
Average lap speed
Lap length
Top speed during lap
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD
function (Y page 191)
page 170)
RParking (Y
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
X
Z
245
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
246
Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist System), the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE®
and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
X
!÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill start
assist are not available due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill start assist are
not available due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
247
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
248
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T!
÷
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the
HOLD function, PRE-SAFE® and hill start assist are not available
due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)J(Canada
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
X Release the parking brake.
$(USA
only)J(Canada
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
sounds.
only)
Please Release
Parking Brake
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
Display messages
#
Check Brake Pad
Wear
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
G
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.
X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Collision Preven‐
tion Assist Plus
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are:
mbrace Inoperative
Rthe
radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Restart the engine.
X
Collision Preven‐
tion Assist Plus
Inoperative
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative
due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
249
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
250
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE
Functions Cur‐
rently Limited See
Operator's Manual
PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
Rfunction
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rthe
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 77).
X
PRE-SAFE
PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
Functions Limited
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Radar Sensors
Dirty See Opera‐
tor's Manual
At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:
RCOLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Brake
RPRE-SAFE® PLUS
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist
will not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Possible causes are:
RPRE-SAFE®
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe
function of the driving system or driving safety system is
impaired due to heavy rain or snow
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are
operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Switch off the engine.
X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 321):
Rin the radiator trim
Rin the front bumper
Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear
bumper
X Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
X
Z
251
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
252
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
SRS. Malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems
(Y page 44).
6
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusFront Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
G WARNING
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trigService Required
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Rear
Right Malfunction
Service Required
6
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
or Right Side Cur‐
tain Airbag Mal‐
function Service
Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Front Passenger
deactivated during the journey, although:
Airbag Disabled
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult
ual
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger
seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled
the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee
bag (Y page 54)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Z
253
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
254
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54).
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Front Passenger
enabled during the journey, even though:
Airbag Enabled
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sysSee Operator's Man‐
tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
ual
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
may be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air
bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 54)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding light will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Corner‐
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light
b
Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam
b
Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal
b
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
255
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
256
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
Check Center Brake
Lamp
Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
Check Left High
Beam or Check
Right High Beam
b
Check Left License
Plate Lamp or
Check Right
License Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
b
The rear fog lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear fog lamp
Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
Check Left Reverse
Lamp or Check
Right Reverse Lamp
Display messages
b
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
b
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The active light function is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The exterior lighting is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The light sensor is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Rear right side
marker lamp
Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Day‐
time Running Light
Active Light Sys‐
tem Inoperative
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
Switch Off Lights
Z
257
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
258
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe
windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant
Level See Opera‐
tor's Manual
?
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 315).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The fan motor is faulty.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
G WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
#
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's Man‐
Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
259
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
260
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level
is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster and interior lighting.
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance.
The battery is being charged.
4
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
Stop Vehicle See
Operator's Manual
Start Engine See
Operator's Manual
Check Engine Oil
At Next Refueling
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 313).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
X
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
Check Engine Oil
otherwise be damaged.
Level (Add 1 quart)
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 313).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
Engine Oil Level
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 313).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).
8
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C
8
Gas Cap Loose
X
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
X
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
X If necessary, take a break.
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¨
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Attention Assist
Inoperative
Vehicle Rising
Z
261
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
262
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¨
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds.
X Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
¨
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Vehicle Rising
Please Wait
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐
cle Too Low
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
¨
The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 191).
Malfunction
Off
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
or Active Lane
Keeping Assist Cur‐
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe
windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Clean the windshield.
X
Lane Keeping
Assist Inopera‐
tive or Active
Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual or
Active Blind Spot
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rfunction
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Restart the engine.
X
Z
263
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
264
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative or
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist Can‐
celed
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 200).
Park Assist Inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
ative
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 200).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist Fin‐
ished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 181).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 181).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Restart the engine.
X
DISTRONIC PLUS
Inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.
The following may have also failed:
RBAS
PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
Brake
RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
RPRE-SAFE®
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
pended
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 181).
X
Z
265
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
266
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
Rthe
windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Clean the windshield.
X
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Inopera‐
tive
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.
However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 178).
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire Pressure Soon
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-
led new wheels and tires.
tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.
Rthe
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 327).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 352).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 352).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
267
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
268
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Correct
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 355).
Check
Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 327).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Warning
Tire Malfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra
flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 327).
Tire Press. Monitor As a result of interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavail‐ signals are detected from the tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
able
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress. Sen‐
sor(s)Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor Inoperative
No Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
Inoperative
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
269
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
270
Display messages
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
to Start Engine
X Shift the selector lever to position P or N.
Apply Brake
to Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to shift the selector lever to position D, R or N
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Risk of Rolling
Away
Vehicle Not in 'P'
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector lever
is in position R, N or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Close the driver's door completely.
Service Required
Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
X
Only Shift
to 'P' when Vehi‐
cle is Stationary
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
The vehicle is moving.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Transmission Mal‐
function Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components.
A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to
position N.
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
X
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being
charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, shift the selector lever to position P before you switch
off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
N
the trunk lid is open.
Sedan: the trunk lid is open.
X Close the trunk lid.
M
The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all the doors.
_
The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Rear Left Backrest
Not Latched or
Rear Right Back‐
rest Not Latched
Z
271
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
272
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ð
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
Phone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 315).
Power Steering Mal‐
G WARNING
function See Oper‐
ator's Manual
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Check Washer Fluid
SmartKey
Display messages
Â
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Use the correct SmartKey.
X
Â
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X Remove the SmartKey.
Â
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Obtain a New Key
Â
Replace Key Battery
The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.
Change the batteries (Y page 87).
X
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Â
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
Don't Forget Your
Key
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this is
preventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when the
engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key
mode.
Â
Key Not Detected
(white display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
functions in the vehicle.
X
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â
The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warnRemove 'Start' But‐ ing tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
273
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
274
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some
indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after
starting the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
to fasten their seat belts.
After starting the
engine, the red seat
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
engine, the red seat
The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.
ü
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
ing lamp lights up after
The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed.
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
warning sounds.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Safety systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
J (Canada only)
X Release the parking brake.
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
$ (USA only)
G WARNING
J (Canada only)
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charThe red brake system acteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is runX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Z
275
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
276
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
G WARNING
J (Canada only)
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is runX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running. A
warning tone also
sounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®
Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also
unavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
֌!
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also unavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
277
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
278
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 76) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).
å
ESP® is deactivated.
®
The yellow ESP OFF
G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
®
®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform
braking actions.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 76) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Drive on carefully.
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M
AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the
conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT
handling mode" section (Y page 77).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
The restraint system is faulty.
The red restraint sysG WARNING
tem warning lamp is lit
while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
ning.
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems
(Y page 44).
Z
279
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
280
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The yellow Check
Engine warning lamp
lights up while the
engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin
the engine management
the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be
in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Rin
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-
ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp
lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these
states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in
the state in which you are currently driving.
8
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is running.
8
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly
or the fuel system is leaking.
The yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp flashes
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion.
cap.
In addition, the ;
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workCheck Engine warning
shop.
lamp may light up.
?
The red coolant warning lamp lights up while
the engine is running
and the coolant temperature gauge is at the
start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant warning lamp comes on
while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may
be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 315).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
The red coolant warning lamp comes on
while the engine is running. A warning tone
also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may
be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
Z
281
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
282
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 315).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstaThe red distance warn- cle in your line of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also
brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake
(Y page 79).
Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 73).
Tires
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp
G WARNING
(pressure loss/
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the folmalfunction) is lit.
lowing hazards:
Rthey
may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 327).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
The yellow tire pressure
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes for
approximately one
minute and then
remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
283
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
284
285
Useful information ............................ 286
Stowage areas ................................... 286
Stowage and features
Features ............................................. 293
286
Stowage areas
Useful information
Stowage and features
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RNever
exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar of the
driver's door.
RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
for protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).
Glove box
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
to position 1.
Eyeglasses compartment
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
X
i The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 145).
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses in
the headliner on the driver's side.
X To open: pull down eyeglasses compartment : by the handle.
Z
287
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
288
Stowage compartments in the center
console
Stowage compartment under the armrest
All models except AMG vehicles
X
To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
X To close: briefly press the front of handle :.
X
To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
following may be in the stowage compartment: a multimedia connector unit with an SD
card slot and 2 USB ports (Media Interface),
e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3
player; see the separate operating instructions.
Stowage compartment under the front
seats
AMG vehicles
X
Briefly press trim :.
i The stowage tray can be removed.
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stowage compartment, the cover may not be able
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the trunk.
The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
X
To open: pull handle : up and fold
cover ; forwards.
X
X
To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the
fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment under the driver's seat.
Stowage compartments in the rear center console
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side
of the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 286).
Rear bench seat through-loading feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING
X
To open: slide covers : and ; in the
direction of the arrow.
i There is a 12 V power socket in the front
stowage compartment.
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cover of the stowage compartment before folding the rear seat armrest
back into the seat backrest.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Z
289
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
Stowage areas
290
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to
increase the trunk capacity.
Folding the seat backrest back
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged.
Stowage and features
Folding the seat backrest forward
i Vehicles with memory function: when you
fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat
moves forward slightly, when necessary, in
order to avoid contact.
Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forward.
X Open the trunk.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X
i You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle
interior.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve
Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X
the loading guidelines
(Y page 286).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
Stowage areas
RDistribute
Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Always store and secure these or similar
objects in the trunk outside of the EASYPACK trunk box.
! If you exceed the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects
can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk
box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in
direction.
Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always
store and secure heavy objects in the trunk
outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Trunk
: Cargo tie-down rings
EASY-PACK trunk box
The maximum permitted load of the EASYPACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load
of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests
on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided.
Adjusting the height to any position
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When the load surface moves up, your hands
may become trapped on the frame of the
EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.
When the load surface moves up, make sure
that your hands are not within the sweep of
the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the load surface downward.
! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled
out, no objects may be placed on the frame
of the box, nor should the frame be pushed
from above. Otherwise, the box could be
damaged.
! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects
Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop.
X Lowering the load surface: push the center of load surface ; down by hand in the
direction of the arrow until load surface ;
has reached the desired position and the
box is the desired size.
X
can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and
then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
Z
Stowage and features
the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
291
Stowage areas
292
To raise the load surface: press switch
=.
Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically.
X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop.
X
Stowage well under the trunk floor
! Unhook the handle before again before
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to
prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.
Stowage and features
Removing and installing
X
To install: insert retainer ; of box : into
slots =
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: pull handle : up.
X
Raise box : and press hooks A into
anchorage ? as far as they will go.
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise
and right-hand rotating catch B counterclockwise by 90°.
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch
B counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°.
X Move box : downwards and pull it out
from anchorages ?.
Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
X
i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat
surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable
shelf.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the trunk lid fully when
the roof carrier is installed.
! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to
open them.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 392).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
293
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk/cargo compartment.
Stowage and features
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
Features
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNING
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
X
All vehicles (except AMG)
: Cup holder
Z
Features
294
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
water only.
You can remove the insert and the rubber mat
of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them
with clean, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
Stowage and features
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
AMG vehicles
: Cup holder
; Cover
You can remove the rubber mat of the cup
holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it.
Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost
position.
Cup holder in the rear-compartment
center console
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X Press release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back
down, if necessary.
X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
X
X
Bottle holder
To open: slide cover : forwards.
X To remove the insert: slide catch ;
inwards in the direction of the arrow.
X Remove cup holder insert = upwards.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of
the arrow until it engages.
X
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
Features
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk/cargo compartment.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).
! Make sure that any bottles weighing more
than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the
bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
:
;
=
?
A
Mirror light
Bracket
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Vanity mirror
Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up.
Glare from the side
Press the outer edge of button : and slide
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
X
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Fold down sun visor :.
Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
X
X
Z
Stowage and features
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
295
Features
296
Rear window roller sunblind
Stowage and features
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller
sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a
risk of injury.
When extending or retracting make sure that
no parts of the body are in the sweep of the
roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again
if someone becomes trapped. The opening or
closing process is briefly stopped. The roller
sunblind then returns to its initial position.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
stowage space could be damaged.
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
Extending/retracting from the driver's
seat
All vehicles (except AMG)
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by
the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To extend or retract: briefly press button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
X
AMG vehicles
Features
You can remove the ashtray insert and use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.
Cigarette lighter in the front compartment
All vehicles (except AMG)
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X
To open: slide cover ; forwards.
X To remove the insert: pull insert : up
and out.
X To install the insert: install insert : from
above into the holder and press down into
the holder until it engages.
X
Cigarette lighter
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe
hot cigarette lighter falls
child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
Ra
Z
Stowage and features
To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: slide insert ; forwards in the direction of the arrow.
X Remove insert ;.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert
into the holder and press it in the opposite
direction of the arrow until it engages.
X To close: fold down cover :.
X
297
Features
298
Stowage and features
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
AMG vehicles
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
X
All vehicles (except AMG)
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the
engine.
AMG vehicles
To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: fold down cover :.
X
Features
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
299
Ra
service subscription is available
starter battery is sufficiently charged
Determining the location of the vehicle on a
map is only possible if:
Rthe
RGPS
reception is available.
vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X
X
X
Slide cover ; forwards.
Lift up the cover of socket :.
mbrace
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the
USA.
You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
system is activated and operational. To log in,
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will
be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
RAutomatic
and manual emergency call
Assistance call
RMB Info call
You can find information and a description of
all available features under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com.
RRoadside
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs:
RThe
indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
Z
Stowage and features
Rthe
300
Features
Stowage and features
RThe
indicator lamp in one or more of the
following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
- SOS button
- F Roadside Assistance call button
- ï MB Info call button
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will
have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
Rthe
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 299).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered. You cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)
Rvehicle identification number
Rinformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
X
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will
not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
X
To call Roadside Assistance: press Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle
identification number
The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing
the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for
example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 305).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or makes arrangements for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
Rvehicle
Z
301
Stowage and features
Features
Features
302
The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
call button F is flashing continuously.
voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
20 button for ending a phone call.
Stowage and features
Rno
MB Info call button
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle
identification number
The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing
the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for
example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
You can find further information on the
mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
Rvehicle
Rthe
X
To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
indicator lamp in MB Info call button
ï is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
20 button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
Features
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
corresponding button in COMAND/
Audio 20 to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to
COMAND/Audio 20.
However, if you want to use your mobile
phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.
Rthe
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access
to a database with over 15 million points of
interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
X
Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
the controller and confirm with W.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
The destination download function is available if:
Rthe
vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system.
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.
You can use the route assistance function
even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the current route section.
Search & Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on
Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X Go to the website http://
maps.google.com and enter a destination
address into the entry field.
X To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the
website.
Example:
Z
Stowage and features
gency call will take priority and override all
other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
303
304
Features
Stowage and features
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified
when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field.
X Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Calling up a transmitted destination
address
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking
whether navigation should be started.
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
the controller and confirm with W.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must
be confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles
with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
Rthe
Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be
used when you have forgotten to lock the
vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, remote closing may
be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days
the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Locked Remotely message appears in the
multifunction display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
Rthe
Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
X
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use
the received data to decide what kind of
assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle
is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected
message appears in the display. If the Vehicle
Health Check can be started, the Request
for Vehicle Diagnostics Received
Start vehicle diagnostics? message
appears in the display.
X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
X When the Vehicle Diagnostics
Please Start Ignition message
appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X If the Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe position.
message appears: please follow the
instructions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the
Vehicle Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Cancel
Cancel, the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice
connection may be interrupted dur‐
ing data transfer) message appears. The
vehicle data can now be sent.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is
complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
Z
305
Stowage and features
Features
Stowage and features
306
Features
at a later time by another means, e.g. by email or phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check
is the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together
with information about any special offers at
your workshop.
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 28).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 24).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system.
A route can be prepared and sent by either a
customer service representative or under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points.
Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the The <Route
name> external route has been saved
to "Previous Destinations". Would
you like to start navigation? message
on the COMAND/Audio 20 display.
The route is saved.
X To start route guidance: select Yes
Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the
display.
If you select No the saved route can be
called up later in the navigation menu.
X Select Start
Start.
Starting route guidance.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called
up again.
You can find further information in the separate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
Rthe
location where the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select
the way in which you receive this information
beforehand. Possible options include text
message, e-mail or an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each
area.
These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Features
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that:
Rhave
safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating
instructions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not
run the engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated
garage door opener, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 307).
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or
compatible products is also available online
at http://www.homelink.com.
RCanada:
Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener.
Z
Stowage and features
Triggering the vehicle alarm
307
Features
308
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
control the garage door drive.
X To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
seconds have elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at
a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
X Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code
(Y page 308).
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
Stowage and features
X
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 307).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you
will need to use the programming button on
the door drive control panel. The programming button may be positioned in different
places depending on the manufacturer. It is
usually located on the door drive unit on the
garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls",
before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Get out of the vehicle.
X Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
X Get into the vehicle.
X Press previously programmed button ;,
= or ? on the integrated garage door
opener until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
Features
Rif
you live in Canada
you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X Press button B of garage door remote
control A for two seconds, then release it
for two seconds.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code.
X Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
Rif
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the
rear-view mirror, take note of the following
instructions:
RCheck
the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter
frequency can usually be found on the back
of the garage door drive remote control.
The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A
will transmit a strong and precise signal to
the integrated garage door opener.
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the
button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make
sure that new batteries have been installed
in garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Z
Stowage and features
law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
309
Stowage and features
310
Features
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten
seconds and indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
Slide the relevant seat back.
To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X
X
311
Useful information ............................ 312
Engine compartment ........................ 312
Maintenance ...................................... 316
Maintenance and care
Care .................................................... 317
312
Engine compartment
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
Maintenance and care
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
G WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Engine compartment
off the ignition
reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts
Hood
G WARNING
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
Rswitch
Rnever
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
Opening the hood
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Engine compartment
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark
the vehicle on a level surface.
engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Rthe
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Closing the hood
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
X
Z
Maintenance and care
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
313
Engine compartment
314
Example
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Maintenance and care
X
Rusing
engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Adding engine oil
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.
H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Example
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 313).
X
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 389).
Engine compartment
Checking coolant level
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 150).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
X
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 390).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Z
Maintenance and care
Additional service products
315
Maintenance
Maintenance and care
316
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
X
X
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 272).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 391).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 313).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService
A in .. days
A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
RService
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type
of service. A stands for a minor service and B
for a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
Displaying service messages
Switch on the ignition.
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
X
X
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this set-
Care
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must
be checked more often. Further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Rdry,
rough or hard cloths
cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
Rabrasive
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Z
Maintenance and care
ting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
317
318
Care
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
Maintenance and care
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
Rin
towing the vehicle
the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
ventilation/heating is switched off
(the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
Rthe
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise the
vehicle could be damaged.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
door or front-passenger door when the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission selects park
position P automatically and locks the
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N beforehand.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P
automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N:
Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
Care
Cleaning the paintwork
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
! Do not affix:
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Rmagnetic
Power washers
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor
gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
Rtrim
Rventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Relectrical
Rstickers
Rfilms
plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This is the case approximately every three to
five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Z
Maintenance and care
X
319
320
Care
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
shine.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
Maintenance and care
RVigorous
rubbing with unsuitable materials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
i The vehicle should preferably be washed
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and plenty of water.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This
can lead to corrosion damage and damage
to electronic components.
Care
Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
X
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Z
Maintenance and care
X
321
Care
322
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
Maintenance and care
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Cleaning the 360° camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the 360° camera with a power
washer.360
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
Ralcohol-based
thinner or gasoline
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
Rabrasive
Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.
X
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touching them.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
Care
ces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented
oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
covers. If used often, these can damage the
cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
Rdifferences in the texture
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
! To retain the natural appearance of the
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean
genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Maintenance and care
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
323
Care
324
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Maintenance and care
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X
325
Useful information ............................ 326
Where will I find...? ........................... 326
Flat tire .............................................. 327
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 331
Jump-starting .................................... 335
Towing and tow-starting .................. 337
Roadside Assistance
Fuses .................................................. 340
Where will I find...?
326
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFolding
RFuse
wheel chock
allocation chart
RJack
RAlignment
bolt
pair of gloves
RLug wrench
RTowing eye
ROne
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
(AMG vehicles)
Roadside Assistance
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor (Y page 292).
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
(Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible)
: Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage well
= "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Open the trunk lid.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
X
(Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible)
: Towing eye
; One pair of gloves
= Jack
? Folding wheel chock
A Alignment bolt
B Sheet for faulty wheel
C Tire inflation compressor
D Lug wrench
E Fuse allocation chart
X
X
Open the trunk lid.
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps
On vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, a
socket is also provided.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended
tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 327)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 326)
Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 379)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 367).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 170).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 193).
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock (Y page 150).
X Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they do so. Make sure that
no one is near the danger area while a
wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
directly assisting in the wheel change
should, for example, stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 361).
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
sages (Y page 267).
the tire for damage.
Rif driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden and approximately
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
Rcheck
Rvehicle
speed
condition
Routside temperature
Rroad
Roadside Assistance
Flat tire
327
328
Flat tire
Roadside Assistance
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is counted from the moment the tire pressure
loss warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please
observe the following specifications for your
vehicle's tires:
Rsize
Rthe
type and
"MOExtended" mark
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthe
Important safety notes
G WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou
Rthe
hear banging noises.
vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou
see smoke and smell rubber.
RESP®
is intervening constantly.
are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Rthere
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
RRinse
off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
Flat tire
329
RIf
tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation
compressor.
Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
of the housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant bottle :.
X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation
compressor.
X
Using the TIREFIT kit
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well
underneath the trunk floor (Y page 326).
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field
of vision.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(Y page 298) in your vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
X
Z
Roadside Assistance
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Flat tire
330
Roadside Assistance
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run
for five minutes. The tire should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure reached" (Y page 330).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been attained after five minutes, see
"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 330).
If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
then be removed like a layer of film.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at
a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure reached
G WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
instrument cluster in the driver's field of
vision.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come
out of the filler hose after use. This could
cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
X
X
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
H Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been attained after five minutes:
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
X
X
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
Battery (vehicle)
i In cases such as the one mentioned
above, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen
braking
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rin
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress
pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F.
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
the sealed tire.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
X
For further information about ABS and ESP®,
see (Y page 70) and (Y page 75).
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Z
Roadside Assistance
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
331
332
Battery (vehicle)
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
Roadside Assistance
Rby
wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special
collection point for used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESSGO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
electronic components, such as the
alternator, may be damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You
can then no longer move the vehicle.
Battery (vehicle)
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and faceguard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns
should the battery be damaged in the event of
an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be
sufficiently charged.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You
can also charge the battery with a charger
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
Charging the battery
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
Z
Roadside Assistance
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
333
334
Battery (vehicle)
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point.
Roadside Assistance
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 335).
X Open the hood.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 335).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up
at low temperatures, it is very likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jumpstart the vehicle. The service life of a thawedout battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . A
battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information and availability. Read the battery
charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
Jump-starting
335
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe
battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
Z
Roadside Assistance
G WARNING
336
Jump-starting
ROnly
jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
RMake
Rthe
jumper cables are not damaged.
the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Roadside Assistance
Rwhen
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
Towing and tow-starting
337
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe
engine is not running.
brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
Rthe
G WARNING
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen
Rin
towing the vehicle
the car wash
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Rthe
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
towing eye could detach itself
vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Rthe
i Details on the permissible gross vehicle
weight of your vehicle can be found on the
vehicle identification plate (Y page 386).
This could damage the vehicle.
use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission
may shift to position P when the driver's or
front-passenger door are opened, which
could lead to damage to the transmission.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
Z
Roadside Assistance
Towing and tow-starting
338
Towing and tow-starting
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or
trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
In the event of damage to the electrical
system
If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 335).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Example: towing eye covers
i Disarm the automatic locking feature
(Y page 91). You could otherwise be locked
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles)
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, behind the covers.
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 326).
X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the
direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess.
X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
Towing and tow-starting
X
X
Take cover ; off the opening.
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as
it will go and tighten it.
i When towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard
warning lamp starts flashing again.
Removing the towing eye
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Position cover : on top of the bumper and
press it in at the bottom until it engages.
X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
339
X
X
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 337).
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
you must observe the following points:
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 151).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 124).
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be towed with the rear axle raised.
The vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even roll over.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system.
Transporting the vehicle
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
X
Z
Roadside Assistance
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
Fuses
340
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock.
X Secure the vehicle.
X
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
Roadside Assistance
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or
damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system
If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 335).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 335).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 340).
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 170).
X Switch off the engine.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
Fuses
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Rfuse box located in the trunk on the righthand side when viewed in the direction of
travel
the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
under the trunk floor (Y page 326).
341
To open: take lines : out of the guides.
X Move lines : to one side.
X Open retaining clamps ;.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the seal is lying
correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down the cover and close clamps ;.
X Secure lines : in the guides.
X Close the hood.
X
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 340).
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Fuse box in the trunk
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 340).
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Open the trunk lid.
To open: release cover : at the top right
and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
X
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Open the hood.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X
Z
Roadside Assistance
Fuse box in the engine compartment
342
343
Useful information ............................ 344
Important safety notes ..................... 344
Operation ........................................... 344
Winter operation ............................... 346
Tire pressure ..................................... 348
Loading the vehicle .......................... 355
All about wheels and tires ............... 359
Changing a wheel .............................. 367
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 372
Wheels and tires
Emergency spare wheel ................... 379
344
Operation
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rpay
attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
used correctly can impair the operating
safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and ask about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal
Important safety notes
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel
G WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo
not drive with a flat tire.
replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately
stipulations
recommendations
Information on the sizes and types of wheels
and tires for your vehicle can be found under
"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 372).
Information on tire pressure can be found:
Rfactory
Ron
the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 355)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap (Y page 168)
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 348)
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
Operation
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as
well as after driving off-road or on rough
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:
Rcuts
in the tires
Rpunctures
Rtears
in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 345). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 348).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 379).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving
style
pressure
RDistance covered
RTire
Notes on tire tread
G WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer
tires: â in (3 mm)
tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
RM+S
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the
tire tread.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
Z
Wheels and tires
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
may be damaged.
345
346
Winter operation
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn
that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Wheels and tires
ROnly
mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 327).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach
their full performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 379).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (Y page 327).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can
be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 367).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
are identified by the M+S marking.
Winter operation
Check the tire pressures (Y page 351).
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 352).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 355).
X
X
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 379).
Snow chains
G WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever
install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
RSnow
chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 372).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
roads completely covered by snow.
Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not
snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
pulling away with snow chains installed:
vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
(Y page 76)
RAMG vehicles: (Y page 77)
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in
a controlled manner, achieving an
increased driving force (cutting action).
RAll
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 379).
! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must
drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains
have been mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
Z
Wheels and tires
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
347
348
Tire pressure
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Tire and Loading Information placard
Rthe
Wheels and tires
tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel"
section (Y page 379).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rmonthly,
at least
the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Rif
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure
specifications are vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data shown here. The tire
pressure specifications that are valid for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.
: Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 355).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare
wheel: information on operation with an
emergency spare wheel can be found in the
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various
Tire pressure
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
349
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
and can be found on the tire sidewall
(Y page 361).
If the tire pressures have been set to the
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to
the higher values:
Rif
you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
Z
Wheels and tires
Important notes on tire pressure
Wheels and tires
350
Tire pressure
The tires are cold:
Rwear
Rif
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
excessively and/or unevenly
Overinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rincrease
the braking distance
affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Radversely
Maximum tire pressures
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Underinflated tires may:
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
(Y page 348).
Roverheat,
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
Radversely
leading to tire defects
affect handling
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Tire pressure
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 348).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron
the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it to
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the tire
pressure table (Y page 348).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metal pin in the
valve, using the tip of a pen for example.
Then check the tire pressure again using
the tire pressure checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
X
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a
loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message which
appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire
pressure loss warning system" section
(Y page 352).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 348).
The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad
conditions are wintry.
are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high
rates of acceleration).
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Ryou
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set
tire pressure using the rotational speed of the
wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
Z
Wheels and tires
Checking the tire pressures
351
Tire pressure
352
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Rchanged
X
the tire pressure
the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Additionally, a tire pressure table is
attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 348).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Tire Pressure
menu.
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator active
Restart with OK message appears in the
multifunction display.
Rchanged
Wheels and tires
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
Press the % button.
or
When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel
Cancel.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
X
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
monitor only functions if the corresponding
sensors are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example).
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
Yes
X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted
message appears in the multifunction display.
X
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 354).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
Tire pressure
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 348). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
warning threshold for the warning message is
aligned to the reference values taught-in.
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires
(Y page 355). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. As a result, a
warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 348).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
Rif
the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Z
Wheels and tires
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
353
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
354
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 267).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire
pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit.
When the malfunction has been rectified, the
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a
few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
computer refer to those measured at sea
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher
than those shown by the on-board computer.
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
two-way radios) that may be being operated
in or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electronically
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
Pressure
X Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
X
If the vehicle has been parked for over
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few
minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Monitor Active display message is shown
instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
pressures are already being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a
few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value
displayed for the position where the spare
wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare
wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message
is shown in the multifunction display and the
yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
comes on.
RIf
the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
and must be corrected at the next opportunity.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in
one or more tires has dropped significantly
and the tires must be checked.
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in one or more tires has
dropped suddenly and the tires must be
checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 267).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for
the wrong positions for a short time. This is
rectified after a few minutes of driving, and
the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.
Loading the vehicle
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor
Country
Radio type approval number
USA
FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada
IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC: 2546A-GG4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details
Z
Wheels and tires
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the
tire pressure monitor will automatically
detect the new reference values after you
have changed the tire pressure. However, you
can also define reference values manually as
described here. The tire pressure monitor
then monitors the new tire pressure values.
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 348).
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 348).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
Pressure
X Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or
the Tire pressure will be displayed
after driving a few minutes message.
X Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as New
Reference Values message appears in
the multifunction display.
355
Loading the vehicle
356
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehiclespecific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
Wheels and tires
of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can
also find information about the maximum
gross axle weight rating on the front and
rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
Loading the vehicle
357
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
Wheels and tires
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Z
358
Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (Y page 355).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
5
3
1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occupants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(91 kg)
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg)
540 lbs (245 kg)
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Wheels and tires
Step 2
150 lbs (68 kg)
All about wheels and tires
359
Step 3
Example 2
Example 3
Permissible load
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
(maximum gross vehi- 750 lbs (340 kg) =
cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg)
the Tire and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
All about wheels and tires
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 355).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all
passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight
(if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the
maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle
weighbridge.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire
manufacturers have to grade tires using three
performance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Z
Wheels and tires
Example 1
360
All about wheels and tires
Example:
RTread
wear grade: 200
grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
RTraction
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Wheels and tires
Treadwear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
tires. Observe the legally required minimum
tire tread depth (Y page 345). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S
tires) (Y page 346).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
All about wheels and tires
Overview
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 365)
; Department of Transportation, Tire Iden-
tification Number (Y page 364)
Maximum load rating (Y page 363)
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 350)
Manufacturer
Tire material (Y page 364)
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 361)
D Load index (Y page 363)
E Tire name
=
?
A
B
C
The markings described above are on the tire
in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
:
;
=
?
A
B
Tire width
Nominal aspect ratio in %
Tire code
Rim diameter
Load bearing index
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure
that are only designed for temporary use in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcuZ
Wheels and tires
Tire labeling
361
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
362
lated by dividing the tire width by the tire
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 355).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 363).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 363).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
1
Index
Speed rating
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally,
tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
RIf a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
find out the maximum speed.
RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of
the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask
the tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Q M+S1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
T M+S1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Or M+S i for winter tires.
All about wheels and tires
Index
Speed rating
H M+S1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
363
Load index
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the
tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:
Rall
vehicles (except AMG vehicles):
130 mph (210 km/h)
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
RAMG vehicles with Performance Package:
186 mph (300 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 372).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed index B on the sidewall of
the tire (Y page 361).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
Wheels and tires
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
364
All about wheels and tires
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 355).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked "2614" was
manufactured in week 26 in 2014.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Wheels and tires
Tire characteristics
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 344).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
This information describes the type of tire
cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
and under tire tread ;.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
All about wheels and tires
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. The quality
grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S.
government. The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed
on the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe
curb weight of the vehicle
weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Rthe
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.
Z
Wheels and tires
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the U S Department of Transportation.
365
366
All about wheels and tires
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for
which a tire is approved.
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
force to every square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds
per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in
bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
Rif
the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the
curb weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Tread wear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 327) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
(Y page 327).
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare
wheel is mounted as described under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 368).
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 368).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
book is available, the tires should be rotated
every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
not change the direction of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 352) or the tire pressure
monitor (Y page 355).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. These advantages can only
be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Z
367
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Changing a wheel
368
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 193).
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock (Y page 150).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle (Y page 326).
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Wheels and tires
X
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
X
On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
X
On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 326).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Changing a wheel
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps:
the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap.
Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you
must remove the hub cap.
RMake
RTo
To remove: remove socket ; and lug
wrench = (Y page 326).
X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and turn
hub cap : counter-clockwise.
X Remove hub cap :.
X To install: before installing, check hub
cap : and the wheel area for soiling and
clean if necessary.
X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is
in the right position.
X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
tighten hub cap :.
The tightening torque must be
18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
X
i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have the hub cap installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Wheels and tires
raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
369
Changing a wheel
370
Wheels and tires
X
Using a lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits
completely on jacking point ?. The base of
the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X Turn crank B until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
X
Removing a wheel
! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake discs:
Jacking points
during removal and repositioning of the
wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second
person assist you. Alternatively, you can
use a second alignment bolt.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X
Position jack A at jacking point ?.
Changing a wheel
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
X
371
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Mounting a new wheel
G WARNING
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 367).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake discs:
during removal and repositioning of the
wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second
person assist you. Alternatively, you can
use a second alignment bolt.
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.
X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
inflate the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 381).
Only then lower the vehicle.
X
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
! Vehicles with a collapsible spare
wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate
the collapsible spare wheel with the tire
inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
Z
Wheels and tires
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
Wheel and tire combinations
372
Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing
firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO
= Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 348).
Wheels and tires
X
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
wheels mounted must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to
come into contact with the bodywork and
axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables:
RBA:
both axles
front axle
RRA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
RFA:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 348).
Wheel and tire combinations
373
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 327).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheels and tires
Rtires
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
i On the following pages, you can find infor-
mation on approved wheel rims and tire
sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available at the
factory as standard equipment or optional
extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The size of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Z
Wheel and tire combinations
374
Tires
CLS 400
Summer tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R 19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-weather tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
Available as MOExtended tires.
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
2
3
Wheel and tire combinations
375
CLS 400 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R 19
All-weather tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R 18
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
Available as MOExtended tires.
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
2
3
Z
Wheel and tire combinations
376
CLS 550
Summer tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
All-weather tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R18
2
3
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i3
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
Available as MOExtended tires.
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Wheel and tire combinations
377
CLS 550 4MATIC
Summer tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Wheels and tires
R19
All-weather tires
R18
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3
FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
Winter tires
R18
2
3
Tires
Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2
BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
Available as MOExtended tires.
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Z
Wheel and tire combinations
378
CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Wheels and tires
Winter tires
R19
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i3
CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC
Summer tires
R19
3
4
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3, 4
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
Emergency spare wheel
379
Tires
Alloy wheels
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4, 5
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i3, 4
FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
Emergency spare wheel
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt
your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
Rdo
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
General notes
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 348). The value on the wheel is
valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel
tire pressure can be found under "Technical
data" (Y page 382).
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning sys-
Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
4
5
Z
Wheels and tires
Winter tires
R19
380
Emergency spare wheel
tem/the tire pressure monitor when the
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the
system may still display the tire pressure of
the removed wheel for a few minutes. The
value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the
current tire pressure of the emergency
spare wheel.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/
collapsible spare wheel
Wheels and tires
Removing the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
Removing the collapsible spare wheel
(AMG vehicles)
The emergency spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and
lift it up.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 368).
Stowing a used collapsible spare
wheel
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
The emergency spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).
X Turn stowage well ; counter-clockwise
and remove it together with vehicle tool kit
tray :.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel =.
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise fit
into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew
the valve insert from the valve and release
the air.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
minutes.
X
X
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
Screw the valve cap back on.
Emergency spare wheel
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time
without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Mount the collapsible spare wheel as
described (Y page 368).
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated.
X Pull connector ? and the hose out of the
housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut : of the hose onto the
valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(Y page 298) in your vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).
X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A on the
electric air pump to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve
button ; until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
X Unscrew air hose union nut : from the
valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again.
X Stow connector ? and the hose in the
lower section of the tire inflation compressor.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
X
Z
Wheels and tires
Remove the protective sheet from the vehicle tool kit and pull it over the collapsible
spare wheel.
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the
emergency spare wheel well under the
trunk.
X
381
382
Emergency spare wheel
Technical data
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Tires
Alloy wheels
T 155/60 R18 107 M
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.5 B x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
AMG vehicles
Wheels and tires
Collapsible spare wheel
Tires
Alloy wheels
175/50 – 19 97 P
Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)
6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 0.55 in (14 mm)
383
Useful information ............................ 384
Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 384
Vehicle electronics ........................... 384
Identification plates ......................... 386
Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... 387
Technical data
Vehicle data ....................................... 392
384
Vehicle electronics
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to
Technical data
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Vehicle electronics
Retrofitting two-way radios and
mobile phones (RF transmitters)
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere
with the vehicle electronics, for example:
Rif
the RF transmitter is not connected with
an exterior antenna
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This can compromise the operational safety
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
RF transmitters are not observed.
In particular, the following conditions must
be complied with:
Ronly
approved wavebands may be used.
with the maximum permissible output in these wavebands is
required.
Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Rcompliance
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the
health of others. Using an exterior antenna
takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
The following antenna positions may be used
if RF transmitters have been properly installed:
Vehicle electronics
385
approved antenna positions
: Front roof area
; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
? Trunk lid
i When installing an antenna on the front
roof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof,
observe the sweeping range of the roof.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the
vehicle closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS
21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters
(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
antenna connections intended for use with
the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when
installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Waveband
Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:
RRF
transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmission frequencies in the range 380-410 MHz and a maximum transmission output of 2 W (Tetra)
RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions
on the outside of the vehicle for the following
wavebands:
RTrunked
radio/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G)
Z
Technical data
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
Identification plates
386
Identification plates
i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the front left-hand door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
Technical data
X
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
; VIN
= Vehicle model
Engine number
: Emission control information plate,
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
; VIN
= Paint code
including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake
fluid
RWindshield
washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused
by the use of products which have not been
recommended is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz
Operator's Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe
(e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
R0
W-30
W-30
R5 W-40
R5
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
RMB
Z
Technical data
Service products and filling capacities
387
388
Service products and filling capacities
Tank capacity
RM100
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model
Total capacity
AMG vehicles
All other models
Model
21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
Of which
reserve
AMG vehicles
All other models
Approx.
2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
Technical data
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium
grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
95 RON.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
engine failure.
! Do not use the following:
RE85
(gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
(100% methanol)
with metalliferous additives
RGasoline
RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Otherwise, engine damage may
occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed
with cleaning additives recommended by
Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can
obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:
ROnly
fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
as soon as possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption.
Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-
Service products and filling capacities
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with
the instructions for use on the product
label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could
build up in the injection system as a result. In
such cases, and in consultation with an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
change the engine oil or oil filter in order to
achieve longer replacement intervals than
those prescribed. You could otherwise
cause engine damage or damage to the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products
(Y page 387).
The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use
engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model
MB Approval
All models
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for AMG vehicles.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model
Capacity
AMG vehicles
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Z
Technical data
eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower
AKI.
Information on refueling (Y page 168).
389
390
Service products and filling capacities
Engine oil viscosity
Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
Technical data
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil
with the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 387).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Service products and filling capacities
Rcorrosion
protection
protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:
Rantifreeze
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling washer fluid
(Y page 387).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Filling capacities
Model
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Capacity
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
Approx. 10.9 US qt
(10.3 l)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
Approx. 11.5 US qt
(10.9 l)
AMG vehicles
Approx. 11.4 US qt
(10.8 l)
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Z
Technical data
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 387).
The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks:
391
392
Vehicle data
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG
Technical data
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be
damaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible
dangers
service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop
Rhaving
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
AMG vehicles
Capacity
Refrigerant
PAG oil
All other models
Refrigerant
PAG oil
Capacity
20.8 ± 0.4 oz
(590 ± 10 g)
4.2 oz
(120 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe
Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Vehicle data
Model
AMG vehicles
: Opening height
71.1 in
(1805 mm)
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
70.7 in
(1796 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
70.3 in
(1786 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
Model (except AMG
vehicles)
Vehicle length
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
194.4 in (4937 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
195.0 in (4952 mm)
Model (except AMG
vehicles)
AMG vehicles
Vehicle length
195.6 in (4967 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Vehicle height
56.3 in (1431 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius
All models (except
for AMG vehicles)
36.9 ft (11.25 m)
Vehicle height
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
56.1 in (1424 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
55.8 in (1418 mm)
Model (except AMG
vehicles)
Turning radius
CLS 400
36.7 ft (11.18 m)
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
CLS 400 4MATIC
37.8 ft (11.51 m)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
CLS 550
36.8 ft (11.21 m)
CLS 550 4MATIC
37.8 ft (11.53 m)
Z
Technical data
Dimensions and weights (CLS Coupe)
393
394
395
396
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project